Home

Micro-Manager 2.0.00 Manual

1. Qual Each element of the Qual column contains the quality indicator for the pseudorange observation for the satellite on that row According to the RTCM standard Version 2 2 the pseudorange quality indicator is the one sigma pseudorange measurement error as indicated below Value Description 0 Pseudorange Error lt 0 020 meters 1 Pseudorange Error lt 0 030 meters 2 Pseudorange Error lt 0 045 meters 3 Pseudorange Error lt 0 066 meters 4 Pseudorange Error lt 0 099 meters 5 Pseudorange Error lt 0 148 meters 6 Pseudorange Error lt 0 220 meters 7 Pseudorange Error gt 0 329 meters 8 Pseudorange Error lt 0 491 meters 9 Pseudorange Error lt 0 732 meters 10 Pseudorange Error lt 1 092 meters 11 Pseudorange Error lt _ 1 629 meters 12 Pseudorange Error lt 2 430 meters 13 Pseudorange Error lt 3 626 meters 14 Pseudorange Error lt 5 409 meters 15 Pseudorange Error gt 5 409 meters MP Each element of the MP column contains the estimated multiplath error indicator for the pseudorange observation for the satellite on that row The following lists the error associated with the MP value according to the RTCM standard Version 2 2 Value Description 0 Multipath Error lt 0 100 meters 1 Multipath Error lt 0 149 meters 2 Multipath Error lt 0 223 meters 3 Multipath Error lt 0 332 meters 4 Multipath Error lt 0 495 meters 5 Multipath Error lt 0 739 meters 6 Multipath Error lt 1 102 meters 7 Multi
2. Port Speed The speed of the communications port over which Micro Manager is currently communicating Settings Save Mode Indicates whether or not various receiver parameters e g satellite elevation mask and epoch interval will be saved between receiver power cycles i e turned off and then later turned back on For uZ CGRS receivers this parameter will always be On i e the receiver is always in Save Mode For other uZ Family receivers the save mode is selectable and can be configured through Micro Manager see Section 4 1 5 4 7 The value reported here is the value set by the receiver command PASHS SAV command Please consult your receiver manual for details on that command and the receiver parameters affected by the receiver parameters save mode Ring File Mode Indicates whether or not the receiver s Ring Buffer File Mode is enabled When this mode is enabled the receiver is designed to always make room for the most recent data by deleting older files When in this mode the receiver manages the files automatically e deleting the oldest file when more room is needed to store recent data When the Ring Buffer File Mode is not enabled the receiver will stop recording data once the receiver s memory becomes full For complete details on the Ring Buffer File Mode please consult the receiver manuals Micro Manager does permit the changing of this mode see Section 4 1 5 4 7
3. 171 In this window you can edit all of the data related to the header data of the output RINEX meteorological file To obtain the specifics of the meanings of each of these fields it is suggested that you consult the RINEX standard documentation The data of this window will be saved between runs of the program Furthermore this data will be used in the command line mode when creating the output file E 3 2 Command Line Approach The Command Line approach to running XYZAshkRx is invoked by calling the program with the command line parameters listed in this section The Command Line approach permits automatic conversion to RINEX of raw Ashtech data files without human intervention In this way programs or batch files can automatically convert Ashtech data files to RINEX Sections E 3 1 1 1 E 3 1 1 2 and E 3 1 2 5 discuss information that is written to the RINEX header when using the Manual GUI approach This RINEX header information is also written to the output files when using the Command Line approach but it is assumed that you have pre configured the program with the desired information The pre configuration is performed by using the Manual GUI method described in Sections E 3 1 1 1 E 3 1 1 2 and E 3 1 2 5 Once the configuration has been entered using the menus of Sections E 3 1 1 1 E 3 1 1 2 and E 3 1 2 5 and you have exited the Manual GUI run of the program the configuration will be saved and usable from the Command Line appro
4. Auto Options tab FTP Configuration The FTP Host Connect Attempts establishes the number of times that this program when run from its command line see Section G 3 1 1 1 will attempt to re connect with an FTP host site The Delay Between Host Attempts parameter is used to specify the number of seconds between re connect attempts If XYZs_FTP never connects to the host a notice will be written in the Log file created by the program see G 3 1 1 2 3 G 3 1 1 2 2 Configuring Sounds XYZs_FTP is capable of playing WAV files when an alert or warning condition arises see Section G 3 1 for an explanation of these conditions The Sounds tab of the FTP Configuration window allows one to set the sound files that will be played when the alert or alarm condition arises IT IS IMPORTANT TO NOTE THAT XYZs_FTP DOES NOT CHECK TO ENSURE THAT A YOU HAVE A SOUND CARD AND B THAT YOUR SOUND CARD IS CAPABLE OF PLAYING WAV FILES If your computer does not have a sound card it is suggested that you not attempt to play any sounds i e that you leave the Play sound file on Warning and Play sound file on Alert checkboxes unchecked 196 FTP Configuration x Auto Options Sounds Log File JV Play sound file on Warning Gz Select File D source Sounds BFWarn wav IV Play sound file on Alert D source Sounds KFAlert wav To play a sound file on the Warning condition ensure that the
5. As mentioned earlier when an alert or warning condition arises XYZs_FTP will display a window explaining what would likely cause such a condition The following is an example of a window displayed during an alert condition XYZs_FTP ALERT Condition Eg An error occured attempting to connect to host ftp ashtech com Error Reported is Hull Remote Address KY2 2 0f Gps Each of these windows announcing alert and warning conditions are controlled by a timer If you fail to respond using the OK button within that window and the timer expires then the window will be removed We have taken this approach because error conditions may arise during the command line i e unattended mode of the program When this occurs these windows will still be displayed and removed when the timer runs out The error condition will be written to the Log File see Section G 3 1 1 2 3 and the Status Information Area described above XYZs_FTP can be configured to play a sound file when alert or warning conditions occur Separate sound files can be played to distinguish between warning and alert conditions Refer to Section G 3 1 1 2 2 for more details on configuring X YZs_FTP to play sound files G 3 1 1 Configuring the Program Before running the program you are advised to set the configuration to meet your needs The configuration options are accessed using the Configuration menu item of the main menu Upon selecting the Configu
6. 2 1585 1002 Jun 16 2001 Micro Z j E e micron z 2 1123 1002 Jun 25 2001 SENSORIT F Vy EGA 1 16 02 5 37 20 PM Attempting connection to Host a ftp ashtech com 1 16 02 5 37 20 PM FTP Hpst Resolved 1 16 02 5 37 23 PM Obtainig Directory Listing 1 16 02 5 37 25 PM ETP Command Complete List success 1 16 02 5 37 37 PM FTP Command Complete ChangeDir success 1 16 02 getline PM Obtainig Directory Listing 1 16 02 5 9 PM ETP Command Complete List success el 7 Local Computer Area Status Information Area Presented above is the main program window divided into sections the names of which will be used for reference These sections are briefly described in the table that follows Brief Description Main Menu The main menu of the program Through these one accesses various information and settings of the program 190 Quick These buttons are placed here to allow quick access to several features of Operation the program Connect is used to start the process of connecting to an FTP Buttons server Disconnect will become available once a connection with an FTP host has been established The button is used to break the connection with the connected host Stop Transfer becomes available when an FTP i e Local Computer elements that allow one to interact with the local computer system For Area example the last drop down list box in this area is used to select another drive on the local c
7. Field Description Ref Health The health flag being reported in the Type 6 message Seq The RTCM Sequence Number SQNU attached to the RTCM Type 6 message 4 1 4 6 5 RTCM Type 9 Display RTCM Type 9 messages communicate a partial set of Differential GPS Corrections The contents of the message are the same as that for Type 1 messages The only difference between the two messages is that Type 1 was designed to contain correctors for all visible satellites in a single message while Type 9 was designed to interleave the correctors over several messages Ashtech uZ Family receivers will send up to 3 sets of correctors per Type 9 message The screen capture that follows shows an example display generated by Micro Manager to report RTCM Type 9 messages The display shows the last RTCM Type 9 message sent Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 6 Type 9 type 15 Type 16 Type 18 Type 19 Type 20 Type 21 Ty gt Time Of Message fi7 46 28 00 Station ID ft 23 Z Count fesoo e Ref Health p Seq fe The following table contains a description of each parameter displayed in the RTCM Type 9 message display Field Description Time Of The GPS time expressed as time of GPS day at which the Type 9 Message message was sent for Base station or received for Rover stations If the message is over a second old then the time will also contain an age display If such a message has not bee
8. Host to select the desired host site Upon pressing the Connect button XYZs_FTP will attempt to connect with the specified FTP host system During the connection process many of the display elements of the main window will be disabled After the connection is established XYZs_FTP will attempt to load and display directory information of the host FTP site in the main window FTP Host Area described in Section G 3 1 The sub sections that follow describe the window elements features of the main window once a connection has been established G 3 1 2 1 Local Computer Area Window Elements Section G 3 1 shows a breakdown of the major window elements of the main window The elements labeled Local Computer Area in Section G 3 1 will now be described Within the Local Computer Area is information related to your local computer and GUI elements that allow one to interact with the local computer system The topmost element of this area contains the current working directory of the local drive The next control element below that allows one to select the current path of the local hard drive The next pane to follow contains the set of files stored in the selected path This pane allows one to select a single file upon doing so the file transfer button of the Local Computer Area will be enabled which will be described shortly The next pane contains the device selection drop down list box Through this drop down list b
9. The following provides an example of the window with a warning indication to x r F ri himinn I n nimai F pll ia Ceai Fam van CET MPPP A APPERT Diii We h im i ep 7am T ha m 2 fen tor PER Lee i CETERI Bra baiati dee ooh Tie coed Pile fois mes ino drive eel pamine fie ceeded ieee bile mime Cec lend Duli parii Tih dbiil Llei ELL jaiii fied diie edd palina i 1 i vi iLi TETI The resama ET hone im bilo man ma drien mii pmimass j ITFENPI The meed K Berigeien Pils mess Cincimies Pall pahi a ba be Notice in the above example that the position of the warning appears to be the mnemonic FPRXOF i e the RINEX output option has not been selected Currently there are only four warnings displayed by Micro Manager These are 1 Expansion of mnemonics causes command line length to exceed maximum 62 2 Mnemonic does not agree with selected configuration 3 Badly formed or unrecognized command line mnemonic 4 Invalid working directory for the program The first warning occurs when the expanded form of the command line causes the command line to exceed 256 characters i e 256 characters is the maximum per command line command The second warning occurs when the current configuration of Micro Manager conflicts with the command line mnemonic For example your command line uses a mnemonic that represents RINEX Data files yet no RINEX data conversion options have been selected The
10. iCGRS Receiver Networking Configurations 9 Auto unpacking of U Files that have been FTP pushed via iCGRS receivers using the utility program TRUMP provided with Micro Manager Using Micro Manager users can configure receiver logging sessions This feature referred to as the Session Programming feature establishes the time periods during which GPS data will be recorded and the parameters governing that collection For example the user can define a data collection session beginning at 1 00 AM every day lasting 1 hour based upon a 1 second data epoch with an elevation mask of 5 degrees The user could then define another data collection session up to 24 sessions beginning at 10 00 AM every day lasting 4 hours based upon a 20 second data epoch with an elevation mask of 10 degrees and storing data only when there are 4 or more satellites Micro Manager also can be called from a command line This facilitates automatic and or unattended management of local or remote receivers Using this feature one can command Micro Manager to dial up and download receiver data Furthermore you can instruct Micro Manager to delete the successfully downloaded files from the receiver s memory thereby enabling further data collection within the receiver For Windows NT users the AT command of the Scheduler service can be used to schedule runs of Micro Manager In fact one can set up a batch file containing commands to dial your entire se
11. 2 fineniver Sysiem Hesers Breet Memor lio ieri Pi iw recne seer kean e wives poma xom itech This window deals with firmware resets and file memory storage resets The following table lists the choices of the drop down list box and description of each Choice _ _ Description No Reset No memory or firmware reset will occur This is supplied only to avoid possible confusion when you have selected the Reset internal receiver parameters checkbox in the first half of the window Internal Reset the receiver s internal memory i e the battery backed up memory that stores the configuration parameters of the receiver e g epoch intervals session programming and elevation masks This option unlike the Reset internal receiver parameters checkbox of this window will reset all of the parameters of the receiver There is one exception however which deals with the modem options This will be described toward the end of this section External Reset the receiver s file memory storage This operation will send a command to the receiver that instructs it to fully erase its file storage memory area and then validate that that memory area is operating properly 118 Choice __ Description Int amp Ext Selecting this option and then pressing the OK button will result in the issuance of a receiver command instructing the receiver to perform a full Internal and External reset That i
12. GPS time of day This will be adjusted by the Offset Per Day for each day after that reference day End Time The end time of the session GPS time of day This will be adjusted by the Offset Per Day for each day after that reference day Span Time The time span of the session i e end time minus start time Interval The observation epoch interval for the session i e the epoch data rate Elev The satellite elevation mask used during the session to filter out low elevation satellites SVs The minimum number of satellites required for the data to be recorded at an epoch Type This parameter is typically referred to as the Data Mode of the receiver It defines the format of the data stored by the receiver Consult your Receiver Operations Manual for details on the Data Modes SM This Smoothing parameter is used in conjunction with Data Mode 7 That is data mode 7 is a highly compressed data storage mode To conserve space this compression does not store the additional code smoothing values that are available under the other modes However the receiver can apply the computed smoothing values to the code data before it is compressed Setting this parameter to Y when data mode 7 is enabled will instruct the receiver to apply the code smoothing value to the stored code data To delete a session simply set its start and span times to zero or place your cur
13. Navigation has implemented a multi tiered firmware validation process that safeguards against incorrectly uploaded firmware files In many remote locations where communications are very Iia difficult and often noisy it becomes increasingly difficult to get firmware files uploaded to the receiver in a single upload Because of these potentially harsh communication environments we have allowed parts of the firmware to be uploaded at different times In this way you can begin a firmware file upload allow the upload to continue until the environment makes it difficult to continue stop the upload process and continue where you left off at another time The Automatic recovery mode enabled on firmware uploads parameter when checked allows this partial firmware upload processing to take place Please keep in mind that regardless of the state of this recovery parameter the receiver employs its multi tiered validation process before allowing uploaded firmware files to replace the existing receiver firmware That is once a full firmware file is uploaded to the receiver whether uploaded over a single or multiple attempts there are several quality and validation checks that take place before the receiver permits the actual burning of the firmware program into flash memory 3 1 6 5 Miscellaneous Configuration Items tn raare Laaa Cutie OOO Hz eer Sours Chagreneis Migs Dupas Proto Heomlaeman w apip he Babag manne Bima
14. The working directory of the command 3 The command enable disable indication and 4 The wait for complete indication When entering the text of the command you are free to use the Micro Manager command line mnemonics The valid mnemonics are listed in the scroll box of the window Mnemonics are placeholders for actual values that can only be definitively determined at the completion of a download For example the B File mnemonic inclusive of the directory in which the file is stored is SFPBF When the post download command is entered the placeholder for the B File name and directory is entered as FPBF Just before the command is executed at the end of a download operation Micro Manager substitutes the mnemonic with the actual name of the B File including the drive and directory in which it is stored The working directory is the directory you want passed to Windows as the working directory of the command For most calls it is the same directory as the directory in which the program you are calling is stored In the above window example the program is stored in the directory D Source XYZs_FTP As such we set this directory as the working directory All text entered for the working directory is treated verbatim More specifically Micro Manager does not interpret translate any mnemonics found in the entry of the working directory field 61 The Enable Command checkbox is used to enable disable selected com
15. This state indicates a Atech warning condition and is accompanied by a window which details the warning The letters of the icon toggle between red and black This state indicates an alert condition and is accompanied by a window which details the alert There are two levels of error conditions reported through this program 1 Warnings and 2 Alerts Warnings i e the yellow flashing icon are used to designate conditions that require your attention but are not potentially fatal to proper execution of the program Alerts i e the red flashing icon on the other hand are used to designate conditions that may arise that have a potentially adverse effect on the continued operation of the program and you are advised to immediately terminate the program upon receiving such an alert During command line mode see Section 4 2 Micro Manager will terminate the program when Alert i e not Warning conditions arise As mentioned earlier when an alert or warning condition arises Micro Manager will display a window explaining what would cause the condition The following is an example of a window displayed during a warning condition Warning Condition x 4 attempts to obtain receiver data PASHR CHS Each of these windows announcing alert and warning conditions are controlled by a timer If you fail to respond with the OK button within that window and the timer expires then the window will be removed We have taken
16. Windows to return a complete indication before launching the next command From the perspective of Micro Manager the command has completed However from the perspective of Windows the command may still be executing and has not therefore completed execution from the perspective of Windows When Micro Manager completes the download and conversion of selected files see Section 4 1 5 1 it begins launching the Post Download Commands The command being executed or any errors encountered while attempting to start the command will be sent to the Diagnostic Message Window and the Log File That is if you encounter errors in your post download commands ensure that the Log File is turned on see Section 3 1 6 2 and then run Micro Manager again Any errors will be reported in the Log File and in the Diagnostic Message Window Successful command launches will be displayed in the Post Download Command Summary Window in the Diagnostic Message Window and in the Log File The CPU clock time at which the command was launched will be reported to the Diagnostic Message Window and the Log File The following lists some miscellaneous topics and warnings related to the Post Download Command feature 1 Micro Manager will permit 100 post download commands 2 Micro Manager cannot verify the complete correctness of any Post Download Command As such users should fully checkout their post download commands and the impacts of these commands upon other co
17. You can terminate the capture of received data to a file by pressing the Capture OFF button While the capture feature is enabled all data displayed as received data in the terminal window will be written to the named capture file Your selected state of the Show ASCII only 147 checkbox will have no effect on the data written to the capture file That is the capture file contains all data received in its binary format The Translation button enables you to enter edit a character translation table that will be used when communicating with the receiver through the terminal window For example you can translate each received lt CR gt sequence into a lt CR gt lt LF gt sequence The same goes for output characters as well For example you can configure the outgoing translation table to transmit a lt CR gt lt LF gt sequence in response to a simple lt CR gt character 1 e which is generated when you hit the carriage return on your keyboard The following display is an example of the Terminal Window Translation Table window Terminal Window Translation T able x M Translations of Output Communication Data Carriage Return CR CRLF Line Feed LF Mask z M Translations of Input Communication Data Carriage Return CR cr gt Line Feed LF ILF Y S OK X Cancel itt s Ashtech 4 2 Command Line Mode Micro Manager was designed to run without the need of user interaction i e in an unatte
18. at the completion of a download and translation process This is true but we need to add the idea that one can ask the receiver to download many files in a single download and conversion operation When multiple files are selected for download and conversion the Post Download Commands will be executed for each receiver file download but only after all downloads and conversions have occurred without error 3 1 5 1 Post Download Commands Window The Post Download Command Window is basically the window through which users enter modify order and delete post download commands The following provides an example of this window 257 ira irei T Tha T daw DT Apa ee hg a S A er aa ee ri Yew mem corer Apron finas m b a Awari TI i arhin AFA AGEA EA PL Note You can resize this window by grabbing its lower right corner and dragging the window to expand contract it This window provides the set of commands that will be launched upon completion of a download operation The order in which the commands are listed is the order in which the commands will be translated and launched Notice that each command has the following components O O ee Label Description order in which each post download command will be launched end of the download Indicates whether or not the command processor of Micro Manager when it is executing that particular post download command is to wait for that command to complete before launching the next c
19. consult Windows Help searching on Start Menu and selecting the topic dealing with adding menu items to the Start Menu Finally UPackU 12 is protected by a software sentinel key the same key as is used by Micro Manager The software sentinel key is installed by attaching the end of the sentinel key labeled AXCOMPUTERA to a parallel printer port of your computer Tighten the screws of the sentinel key to connect the key securely to your computer If a printer was connected to your computer attach that cable to the sentinel If the sentinel cannot be installed because of an obstruction behind the computer you can place the sentinel key later in the parallel sequence for 177 example you could attach the sentinel key to a DB 25 male to DB 25 female cable which is connected to your computer s parallel port F 3 RUNNING UPackU12 UPackU12 creates typical Ashtech formatted processing data files from uZ Family receiver image format files The program can be manually instructed to convert files or can be called directly from the command line This latter method allows programs to invoke the converter without the need of human intervention Throughout the remainder of this documentation we will call the former approach the Manual GUI approach and the latter will be called the Command Line approach Both the Manual GUI and the Command Line approaches rely upon configuration information contained in the INI file associated with the conv
20. i e neither green nor red If you do enable the DTR DSR hardware handshaking see Section 3 1 1 3 5 and the receiver port does not support it the DSR indicator will likely become green when connected to the receiver This is because the port of the receiver i e all but Port A of uZ CGRS receivers ties the CTS line to the DSR line However you will get erratic communication behavior when the communication volume becomes high The rationale is really quite simple When the local PC gets too busy it will use the CTS RTS hardware handshaking to slow the data sent by the GPS receiver But because the receiver s port has tied two handshaking lines together the DSR DTR handshaking will be affected and cause confusion To overcome these problems you should avoid using the DTR DSR hardware handshaking unless you have a clear rationale for doing so 4 1 1 3 Connection Status Alert Status Icon The Connection Status Alert Status Icon is used to represent the current state of the link connection and alert states of the program What follows provides a description of each state a Bia When the icon is steady and unchanging then a valid communication port has g not yet been opened Bha The circles above the lettering rotate between green and blue This state Ashtech indicates that Micro Manager is operating normally and without any reported alert or warning conditions 78 Ao The letters of the icon toggle between yellow and black
21. includes Doppler LIC_L2P_ L1 C A and L2 P Code Carrier and Code includes Doppler It should be clear that some selections are not available for some receiver types For example if the input data is from a G 12 receiver a C A L1 only Code and Carrier receiver the selectable output data types for the receiver will not include any of the P Code or L2 observables By default the selection will be set to output all possible observation types for the input receiver type The receiver position labeled as Station Position on the window will come from either the B File data or from a user entered position This decision is made using the Site Position Window which is accessed by pressing the Edit Position button to the right of the station position on this window For further details on the Site Position Window see Section E 3 1 1 2 Remember that the changes entered into this RINEX Header Data Edit Window will be saved as part of the program s configuration data i e stored in the program s INI file In this way the header data need only be configured once Minor changes to the output header data can then be made during each subsequent run of the program E 3 1 1 2 RINEX Site Position Window The RINEX Site Position Window permits you to select the source of the position data output as part of the RINEX header data This window is accessed from the RINEX Header Data Options Window see Section E 3 1 1 1 The
22. install and operate the copy of the computer program contained in this package Program in machine acceptable form only on a single computer one central processing unit and associated monitor and keyboard and ii make one archival copy of the Program for use with the same computer LICENSOR and its third party suppliers retain all rights to the Program not expressly granted in this Agreement OWNERSHIP OF PROGRAMS AND COPIES This License is not a sale of the original Program or any copies LICENSOR and its third party suppliers retain the ownership of the Program and all copyrights and other proprietary rights therein and all subsequent copies of the Program made by you regardless of the form in which the copies may exist The Program and the accompanying manuals Documentation are copyrighted works of authorship and contain valuable trade secret and confidential information proprietary to LICENSOR and its third party suppliers You agree to exercise reasonable efforts to protect the proprietary interests of LICENSOR and its third party suppliers in the Program and Documentation and maintain them in strict confidence USER RESTRICTIONS The Program is provided for personal use or use in your internal commercial business operations and must remain at all times upon a single computer owned or leased by you You may physically transfer the Program from one computer to another provided that the Program is operated only on one computer
23. is a sub directory To change to that sub directory two alternative methods can be used 1 double click the line containing the d or 2 Press the change directory button described below At the bottom area of this window are a set of context sensitive buttons that become enabled or disabled depending upon the current state of the program An enabled button shows color and when the mouse pointer is rested over an enabled button for a moment a hint describing that button will be displayed A disabled button is displayed in a grayed out color and the button does not respond to button presses The buttons are described below This button allows one to create a new folder or subdirectory on the FTP host system assuming the account privileges grant this capability This button allows one to move one directory deeper into the directory tree on the FTP host fa system assuming the account privileges grant this capability One must first select a d entry in the FTP host directory listing pane of the window This button allows one to move one directory up in the directory tree on the FTP host fa system assuming the account privileges grant this capability and one is not at the top level directory 200 This button when pushed will request the removal of the selected sub directory on the i FTP host system assuming the account privileges grant this capability One must first select a d entry in the FTP h
24. receiver When you acknowledge this window via pressing the OK button Micro Manager will terminate This loss of communication will occur during the period that the receiver is executing the reset command But you are advised to disconnect from the receiver for 5 minutes to ensure that the receiver has been fully reset before you attempt to reconnect with it Please note that we previously stated that you could use the Terminal Window to watch the response to the commands that reset the receiver s file storage memory area But as soon as you issue the reset command by pressing the OK button in the Receiver Reset Window this restart warning window is displayed You may wait for the status of the memory clear operation to be reported since the terminal window will still show any responses output by the receiver If so do not press the OK button of this restart warning message until after the memory clear operation is reported and you want to exit the program The one parameter of this window not yet described is the checkbox labeled as Have receiver send modem initialization string The rationale for this is quite simple If you are connected to the receiver via a modem or you have configured the receiver such that it will have a 119 modem attached you will want to re initialize that modem whenever the receiver is reset This will ensure that the modem is fully reset and ready to accept incoming calls This last parameter will beco
25. row displays the elevation degrees of the satellite being tracked The Azimuth row displays the azimuth degrees of the satellite When the receiver cannot compute a position e g when there are too few satellites to compute a position the reported satellite elevations and azimuths will be zero The reported URA User Range Accuracy and Health are obtained from the most recent broadcast navigation message transmitted by the satellite For specifics on the exact meaning of the URA and Health indicators consult your receiver manual As with all other windows in the program Micro Manager will show the units of a displayed field if you rest the cursor over that field for a couple of seconds Also please see the Section 4 1 4 note on how Micro Manager queries data for this window from the receiver 4 1 4 3 Earth Centered Earth Fixed Position and Time Window The Earth Centered Earth Fixed ECEF Position and Time window displays the following information 1 The current GPS time as reported by the receiver 2 The current GMT time reported by the receiver 3 Information on the current position computed by the receiver and 4 Information on the fixed receiver position stored in the receiver The following are two examples of this window 83 ECEF Position and Time ECEF Position and Time In the first example a reference position has been set in the receiver see Section 4 1 5 4 4 In the sec
26. you press the Send button to send the changes to the receiver Upon doing so Micro Manager will await validation responses from the receiver to verify that the parameters sent were accepted by the receiver Any failures will be reported 4 1 6 Terminal Window Micro Manager is equipped with a terminal window that allows you to send commands to the GPS receiver and view the responses To launch this window select File from the main menu bar and then select the Terminal Window sub menu option The following provides an annotated example of the Terminal Window 144 Data Sent Command Text Terminal Window K Command PASHQ RAW PASHQ RID 28 PASHQ PRT 21 PASHO RAW 33 Sends Command Text v v Send PASHR PRT A 8 5B RCI 020 0 MSY 03 ELM 10 ANH 00 0000 ANA 00 0000 SIT RAW MBN PBN CBN SNY EPB SAL PRTA OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF PRTB OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF PRTC OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF PRTD OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF c Upload File eS Capture ON 4 Translation V Add checksum to PASH commands IV Show ASCII Only ASCII Mode Switch Switch PASHR RID UZ 30 VEB1 BUEXMET3JK 0A16 7A REC Y EPG 000 RNG 0 DEN OFF OFF OFF OFF Add Checksum DPC OFF OFF OFF OFF MST 0 FORMAT BAUD ASCII 8 ASCII 5 ASCII 7 ASCII 5 Exit Data Received In the Command Text area i e the area after the title labeled Command y
27. 0 016 16 00 00 016 17 00 00 82944 a no UKEHFR02 016 o 016 17 00 00 ACTIVE 48128 Receiver Memory Status Total 39088 Available 38425 98 3 ey Download E Delete 64 Download amp Delete X Cancel EE X coca Ashtech The displayed window provides information about the receiver memory and the files stored in that memory In the above example there are four files stored in the receiver s memory the last of which is still active i e still collecting data Additionally shown toward the bottom is the amount of free receiver memory available The file list shows each of the files stored in the receiver s memory The columns of this list are described in the following table 108 Column Label Description Sel Indicates whether or not a file has been selected for a particular operation To select a file put the mouse cursor over that row and click With each click you will see the Sel column for that file toggle between No and Yes and you will see that row displayed with a green background The download and delete operations will act upon those files having their Sel flag set to Yes File Name The name of the file as generated by Micro Manager The file name is generated using the other file information displayed in the directory listing and depends upon whether the Use file start time to name files checkbox is checked When checked the file names ge
28. 1 0 The following table contains a description of each parameter displayed in the RTCM Type 1 message display Field Description Time Of The GPS time expressed as time of GPS day at which the Type 1 Message message was sent for Base station or received for Rover stations If the message is over one second old then the time will also contain an age display If such a message has not yet been sent or received then this field will contain None Received Station ID The RTCM Base Station ID contained in the Type 1 message Z Count The RTCM message Z Count ZCNT of the Type 1 message The RTCM Z Count is the time tag of the message and is displayed as seconds of the hour GPS time frame Ref The health flag being reported in the Type 1 message Health 92 Field Description Seq The RTCM Sequence Number SQNU attached to the RTCM Type 1 message SVPRN The SVPRN row displays the GPS satellite numbers for which there are RTCM correctors in the Type 2 message PRC The Pseudo Range Correctors meters for each satellite contained in the Type 1 message RRC The Range Rate Correctors meters second for each satellite contained in the Type 1 message IODE The Issue of Data Ephemeris for each satellite corrector contained in the Type 1 message UDRE The User Differential Range Error for each satellite corrector containe
29. 1 3 1 Once TRUMP converts a U File into Raw Ashtech formatted data files it will optionally convert that Raw Ashtech formatted data files into RINEX files RINEX output configurations are accessed by selecting the RINEX Site Header Table menu item see Section H 3 1 4 Various program configuration settings of TRUMP are collected under the Miscellaneous category Selecting the Miscellaneous menu item displays the Miscellaneous Configuration Options window which is covered in Section H 3 1 5 When you select the Help menu item from the main menu you will be presented with the following drop down menu About Command Line Options When you select the About menu item TRUMP will display a window containing information about the program In response to selecting the Command Line Parameters menu item TRUMP will display a window describing how to invoke the Command Line Mode of the program The command line mode is further documented in Section H 3 2 of this manual 208 H 3 1 1 Diagnostic Messages Window The Diagnostic Message Window is displayed in response to the Diagnostic Messages selection from the program s view menu The following provides an example of the Diagnostic Message Window Pe eee Pij LEANED Chika CLA fran T LT 4 I Leer Ce Oia oe barala EE Tiani Eii ip a Reg eT ai diro bhp Cif 0Ei G0 M GON Canreraian OE CLASES PAT 0 PH et DEP DRED OF TES
30. 104s 1 This type of reset will erase the staging area used for the firmware upload and 2 As mentioned earlier firmware replacement can potentially cause loss or corruption of previously collected data files as the new firmware may invoke a new file storage format and may not recognize the old storage format Therefore you are strongly encouraged to perform a full internal and external reset see Section 4 1 5 2 on your next connection with the receiver 4 1 5 4 Receiver Settings There are nine windows of Micro Manager that deal with the configuration of the receiver By selecting the Settings sub menu of the Receiver main menu item you will be given the following pop up menu ED Cock Parameters iy heterok Settings GR am Port Settings gt Postion Ficed 2 Program Sessions JAE Project Information C fecording Control Rica ETOH Setup Ty Satelite Tracking From this menu you can select the aspect of receiver configuration desired For the parameters you edit through each of these windows Micro Manager will not permit you to enter values outside the range of permissible values for your particular receiver Once you have made your desired changes in these windows simply press the Send button of the window and the changes will be sent to the receiver In all cases Micro Manager will await validation responses from the receiver to verify that the parameters sent are actually accepted by the receiver
31. 2 digit minute of the GPS hour of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File The 2 digit minute truncated to the quarter hour of the GPS hour of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File The 2 digit minute truncated to the quarter hour of the GPS hour of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File The 2 digit second of the GPS minute of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File The 2 digit second of the GPS minute of the end of the data for the receiver U Fle as reported by the contents of the U File The full output path for converted Ashtech Files includes drive and path without trailing V The full output path for converted Ashtech Files without trailing V includes path but not drive letter and no colon after the drive letter FPROP The full output path for converted RINEX Files includes drive and path without trailing V Notes Whenever the option to convert Ashtech formatted files to RINEX files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message ROP The full output path for converted RINEX Files without trailing V includes path but not drive letter and no colon after the drive letter Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert Ashtech formatted files to RINEX files HAS NOT BEEN selecte
32. 87 Field Description Clock Used Indicates the clock in use That is the pZ Family receivers support the use of external clocks The receiver can be configured see Section 4 1 5 4 1 such that it will utilize the internal clock utilize an external clock or to automatically switch between the two clocks Values displayed in this field indicate the current clock use mode Internal Implies that the internal clock is being used External locked Indicates that an external clock is configured and that the receiver has locked onto its clock signal External unlocked Indicates that an external clock is configured and that the receiver is not able to or has not yet locked onto its clock signal Auto switch locked Indicates that the automatic clock switching mode has been enabled and that the receiver has locked onto the external clock signal and therefore the external clock is in use Auto switch unlocked Indicates that the automatic clock switching mode has been enabled but also that the receiver is not able to or has not yet locked onto its clock signal and therefore the internal receiver clock is in use For more details on the use of external clocks please consult the appropriate receiver operations manual External When the Clock Used field indicates that the external clock is Clock Freq configured for the receiver i e indicating either External or
33. APPENDIX E AshRnx32 A Micro Manager Utility cccccsseeeeseees 159 E 1 Introduction to XYZAShRX ssscniceseote sacks onimaiaat essere 159 E 1 1 Minimum System Requiremenths cccssscssscssessssssscsscssscsseesseessessees 159 E 1 2 Demo Versions sessecsscessssoincacossonssodiesedsevsensessasoduccco asus anata essanssteassbasnenudesstadeads 160 E 2 INSTALLATION OVER VIEW vusiconisieoatntaasimusncimncsonmien 160 TD RUNNING XY LASIK roenan ninnaa niia 161 E 3 1 Manual GUI Approach ecsssssssssssssscsssnsssnscnscnsessscnscnscssscnscnsesnsensenes 161 E 3 1 1 File Selection Window niss eonia a ei a e Seara aas 164 E 3 1 1 1 RINEX Header Data Edit Window ee eeeeeeeseneneneneeeeseceeeseseaeaeeesseceeseees 165 E 3 1 1 2 RINEX Site Position WindoW s ssesssesessesiesesserrssssresrssterrsresresrsstresresresresesreseest 167 E 3 1 2 RINEX Meteorological Piles ce essesesessessceseeseeececeeeeseseneneeseeeceeesessavasasasececeeseees 168 E 3 1 2 1 Specifying the Source Meteorological Data File eeeseseeeseseeeteeteeeeeteees 169 E 3 1 2 2 Start Day of the Meteorological Data File 0 0 eeesenenseseceeeseseseseseeeseeeees 170 E 3 1 2 3 Leap Seconds UTC to GPS Conversion 00 ccecsececeeerenensneeeeeecesessseseseeeeseees 170 E 3 1 2 4 Specifying the Output RINEX Meteorological Data File 0 eee 171 E 3 1 2 5 Entering the RINEX Header Data occ se eeeeeeeeeneneneeeeeseeeeeseseaeseeeeeeeeeseees 171 E 3 2 Command Line Approach uu sssssss
34. Auto switched this field will contain the frequency of the configured external clock see Section 4 1 5 4 1 for configuration details Internal This field is used to indicate whether the steering of the receiver s internal Clock clock is enabled or disabled This parameter has no meaning and is Steering therefore displayed as n a when an external clock is being used However when in an Auto switch external clock mode an Enabled status means that the clock steering will be used whenever the receiver switches to the internal clock When Enabled is displayed the receiver s internal clock is steered such that its clock offset remains close to zero i e the receiver s clock will remain very closely aligned with the GPS time system When Disabled is displayed the receiver s clock will not be steered and be permitted to drift with respect to the GPS time system In this mode the receiver s clock offset and pseudo range observations will experience 1 millisecond jumps These jumps occur when the receiver s clock offset has been computed to be approximately 1 ms offset from GPS time For further details on this subject please consult the appropriate receiver operations manual 88 As with all other windows in the program Micro Manager will show the units of a displayed field if you rest the cursor over that field for a couple of seconds Also please see the Section 4 1 4 note on how
35. Data Options Window The RINEX Header Data Options window is displayed in response to pressing the OK button on the File Selection Window See Section E 3 1 1 The following provides an example of this window 165 RINEX Header Data Options REMD 1078329 5143 4829586 2882 4010719 2041 Station Humber XYZTT The XYZ s of GPS Inc TEST CODE The X 2Z s of GPS With the exception of the Output Data Type the data of each field comes from either the Site File or from the saved configuration data of the program i e stored in the INI file of the program When the Site File is not used as input to the program all of the data for this window with the exception of the Output Data Type comes from the saved configuration data When the Site File is used as input the following fields come from that file Station Name Observer s Name Receiver Serial Number Antenna Serial Number Antenna Offsets Slant Radius and Delta Vertical The Output Data Type field is used to specify which RINEX observation fields will be output to the RINEX Observation file The Output Data Type can be one of the following Selection Output Data Types L1 C A Carrier and Code includes Doppler LICP_L2P_ L1 C A L1 P Code and L2 P Code Carrier and Code includes Doppler CDPHASE L1 C A Codephase only 166 LICP L1 C A and L1 P Code Carrier and Code
36. GUI approach to using XYZAshRx and Section E 3 2 will describe the Command Line approach to using XYZAshRx It is important to re state the fact that the configuration information is stored in the file XYZAshRx INI which is stored in the same directory as the program file i e XYZAshRx EXE When you desire an alternative configuration for example to support two Micro Manager installations simultaneously you should copy the following files to another directory XYZAshRx INI XYZAshRx EXE XYZAshRx BMP By doing this you create an independent copy of the INI file Launching the program XYZAshRx EXE in this copied directory causes the program to use the INI file in that directory This copy would utilize a configuration that is independent of the other copy i e the original copy of XYZAshRx on your computer In contrast launching two copies of the XYZAshRx from the same directory accesses the same INI file The configuration stored at the end of the runs of the programs is highly dependent upon which copy of the program terminated first Needless to say you are strongly advised not to launch more than one copy of XYZAshRx from the same directory unless both copies will use the exact same configuration information Launching several copies of XYZAshRx each originating from its own directory is perfectly acceptable and supported by the sentinel E 3 1 Manual GUI Approach Upon starting XYZAshRx without command line paramete
37. Manager does not implement this software protection because there may be some limited reasons to interact with the program when it is in command line mode For example suppose that during a periodic check on an automated run of the program you discover that a particular file transfer is experiencing an unusually large number of errors You may want to abort the transfer operation terminate Micro Manager and then diagnose the problem 4 1 User Interactive Mode In the user interactive mode the user is free to interact with the program through the normal GUI methods Micro Manager is placed in the user interactive mode simply by launching the program with no command line options In this section we describe all of the features that can be exploited to gain the most benefit from the program 4 1 1 Main Display Window Below you will find an annotated example of the main window displayed when Micro Manager is started in its interactive mode 76 Micro Manager User Configurable Window Title Work Area RS 232 Line Menu Bar Status Indicators ajs xo elalelPlel ie ECA alejes Aaloe ele oe x aa Connect Status Information 4 1 1 1 User Configurable Work Area Connection Status Alert Status Icon With the exception of the Main Window Title and the Menu Bar items the sub sections which follow describe each of the above labeled items The user configurable work area of the main window is used to di
38. Manager will generate an error message When using this automatic decompression option of Micro Manager it is important that you configure the RINEX options as desired see Section 3 1 4 There are several RINEX headers and conversion options that may specific to each receiver site such as selecting the agency creating the RINEX file If you make a copy of the Micro Manager program files for the purpose of running multiple copies on a single computer please ensure that you also copy all of the support program files 1 e EXE and INI files associated with programs UpackU12 and XYZAshRx As described in Section 3 1 5 Micro Manager implements a Post Download Command feature Checking the checkbox labeled Launch Post Download Commands after downloads and conversions enables the execution of these commands if there are any entered See Section 3 1 5 for details on Post Download commands There are several other attributes of the receiver files that one can control by right clicking in the file list area Upon right clicking in this area a pop up menu like the following will be displayed Edit Cbg Li Fi Marik Sahect All Fikes Deselect ol Files Change Output Path Show Memory Hap Delete Morel Fhes Selecting the Edit Output U File Name menu option will activate the previously described Rename Output U File window which enables one to rename the currently selected U File The Select All Files menu op
39. Menu bar To create a program icon on the desktop simply browse to the program file XYZs_FTP EXE using My Computer right click and drag the icon to the desktop and select Create Shortcut Here For details on how to add a program to the Start Menu consult Windows Help searching on Start Menu and selecting the topic dealing with adding menu items to the Start Menu Finally XYZs_FTP is protected by a software sentinel key the same key as is used by Micro Manager Pro GBSS GRIM or 3D Tracker The software sentinel key is installed by attaching the end of the sentinel key labeled A8 COMPUTER amp to a parallel printer port of your computer Tighten the screws of the sentinel key to connect the key securely to your computer If a printer was connected to your computer attach that cable to the sentinel If the sentinel cannot be installed because of an obstruction behind the computer you can place the sentinel key later in the parallel sequence for example you could attach the sentinel key to a DB 25 male to DB 25 female cable that is connected to your computer s parallel port G 3 RUNNING XYZs_FTP XYZs_FTP was designed primarily to support the transfer of data files to and from an FTP server There are other features available in this program that will be discussed shortly Some of these features can be accessed through the Graphical User Interface GUD of the program or through command line parameters The command line appr
40. NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message Depending upon the receiver configuration a E File may not be output through the conversion process Micro Manager has no way to verify this when the command is created If no E File is created during the conversion process the post download command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post download command 54 Description The name of the E File converted from the downloaded receiver file does not include drive letter and pathname See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert downloaded receiver files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message Depending upon the receiver configuration a E File may not be output through the conversion process Micro Manager has no way to verify this when the command is created If no E File is created during the conversion process the post download command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post download command The name of the S File converted from the downloaded receiver file includes full path See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after downl
41. Play sound file on Warning checkbox is checked and you use the associated Select File to select the desired WAV file Upon making your file selection XYZs_FTP will test play that selected sound file Likewise to play a sound file on the Alert condition ensure that the Play sound file on Alert checkbox is checked and you use the associated Select File to select the desired WAV file Upon making your file selection XYZs_FTP will test play that selected sound file When either a warning condition or an alert condition exists XYZs_FTP will provide a window describing the alert or alarm condition which will stay visible for about 5 to 10 seconds and then attempt to play the selected sound files every 1 5 seconds i e repeating the sound file every 1 5 seconds while the window is visible Because the XYZs_FTP starts to play these sound files at 1 5 second intervals you are advised to keep your warning and alert sound files shorter than 1 5 seconds to avoid annoying overlaps G 3 1 1 2 3 Configuring Log File The Log File tab of the FTP Configuration window is used to configure an output log file Every message written to the Status Information Area see Section G 3 1 will also be written to the configured log file if the option has been enabled Each separate log file entry will contain a time tag enclosed in square brackets i e and This time tag is the CPU time associated with when the me
42. Send button will reset the RTCM processing within the receiver Consult your Receiver Operations Manual for more details Use Sequence Numbers This checkbox instructs the RTCM Remote receiver to utilize the sequence numbers in the RTCM messages to enhance the communication synchronization checks Consult your Receiver Operations Manual for more details 142 Parameter Description FREQ In the RTCM window there is a table that represents RTCM message types labeled as Type and their output frequency labeled as FREQ With the exception of Type 6 messages i e the Null filler message the output frequencies are from 0 to 99 For Types 1 9 18 19 and 20 21 RTCM messages the frequency specifies the output rate in seconds For Types 2 3 16 and 22 RTCM messages the frequency specifies the output rate in minutes In all of these cases 0 implies that the message is turned off and 99 represents a continuous i e as often as possible output rate Only one message type can be configured with an output rate of 99 The Type 6 RTCM message is a filler message that is when enabled output whenever there is spare communication bandwidth Thus the Type 6 message is either on or off At the time this document was written the 1Z Family of receivers did not implement Type 15 messages This is why the frequency of Type 15 messages is disabled in all modes Base Remote and neither Base nor Remote
43. Serial device converters That is some of these converters do not fully implement the expected and standard features of serial communications devices When this occurs the polling process will fail but you will not likely get an immediate visual clue of this failure You will likely only notice the failure when you try to access the receiver through the 26 receiver status screens or receiver configuration screens of Micro Manager When you have such a device and it does fail as described you can still use that device but you cannot use the polling process Instead you will need to manually implement the polling process That is you can use the PC Communication Port Settings window described above to change the local PC BAUD rate to various speeds until you find the speed of the receiver Then go to the Receiver Communications Port Settings window see Section 4 1 5 4 3 and change the Active receiver port speed to the speed desired Finally use the PC Communication Port Settings window to set the Local PC communication speed to the desired speed Additionally there are slight hardware differences among the members of the uZ Family of receivers One should be aware of these hardware differences when making changes to the communication parameters These should be only of concern when directly connected i e NOT connected via modem to the GPS receiver Specifically with the exception of Port A of uZ CGRS receiv
44. The GPS time expressed as time of GPS day at which the Type 19 Message message was sent for Base station or received for Rover stations If the message is over a second old then the time will also contain an age display If such a message has not been sent or received then this field will contain None Received Station The RTCM Base Station ID contained in the Type 19 message ID Z Count The RTCM message Z Count ZCNT of the Type 19 message The RTCM Z Count is the time tag of the message and is displayed as seconds of the hour GPS time frame Ref The health flag being reported in the Type 19 message Health Seq The RTCM Sequence Number SQNU attached to the RTCM Type 19 message SV Each element SV column contains satellite number pertaining to that row Freq Each element of the Freq column contains the frequency L1 or L2 of the pseudorange observation for the satellite on that row Smooth Each element of the Smooth column contains the smoothing interval of the pseudorange observation for the satellite on that row According to the RTCM standard Version 2 2 the smoothing interval indicates the interval for carrier smoothing of the pseudorange observation Value Smoothing Interval minutes 0 Otol 1 lto5 2 5to15 3 Indefinite Code Each element of the Code column contains the codephase tracking loop CA C A P P Code from which the pseudorange observation is obtained 101 Field Description
45. These script files are in a special format described in Appendix C These script files allow you to create sets of specialized commands you can use to configure the receiver in ways not directly supported by Micro Manager For example you might define a script file named MET TXT that contains the commands needed to configure the GPS receiver to interface with a meteorological sensor on a specified port and at a specified baud rate This feature enables you to pre define an unlimited number of configurations that are then always available for rapid use at a later date When you press the Upload File button you will be presented with a window similar to the following Open Script Upload File 29 x Look in a temp3 El cl E Fiename Files of type fal Files 7 Cancel T Open as read only Using this window you browse to the directory containing the script file and then select the script file you would like to upload to the receiver Again Appendix C contains a description of the format of these script files The Capture ON button in the Terminal Window enables one to capture all received data to a file Upon pressing the button you will be given the opportunity to select name a disk file into which the captured data can be stored Upon successfully selecting naming a capture file Micro Manager will begin capturing data to that capture file At this point the Capture ON button changes to Capture OFF
46. a warning message The name of the RINEX Navigation Data file created from the converted Ashtech data files includes full path See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert Ashtech formatted files to RINEX files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning The name of RINEX Navigation Data file created from the converted Ashtech data files does not include drive letter and pathname See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert downloaded receiver files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message 56 Description FPRXMF The name of the RINEX Meteorological Data file created from the converted Ashtech data files includes full path See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert Ashtech formatted files to RINEX files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message Depending upon the receiver configuration an Ashtech Met File may not be output through the conversion process These Met Files normally contain data collected by external sensors Micro Manager has no way to verify this when the command is created If no Met File is created d
47. access 198 The process of getting your computer connected to a network that communicates with the FTP host site is beyond the scope of this manual For details in this area it is suggested that you contact your MIS Department and or your system administrator or consult your computer manuals e g Windows Remote Access Server XYZs_FTP is capable of uploading to and downloading files from an FTP Server as well as creating and deleting host server directories these are example FTP functions However the account that is setup by the system administrator must grant all of these capabilities or can restrict any of them Therefore your ability to use features of the FTP program are highly dependent upon the account and access privileges granted when the system administrator creates updates your account Once items 1 and 2 are in place you can connect to an FTP site by pressing the button labeled Connect in the upper left area of the main program window Upon doing so you will be presented with a window similar to that described in Section G 3 1 1 1 please consult that section for other details on the editable window elements The main difference between the window shown in Section G 3 1 1 1 and that which will be displayed when the Connect button is pressed is that the OK button will be labeled Connect Before pressing the Connect button on the displayed window simply use the drop down list box labeled
48. as is indicated in the introduction to this Appendix 152 Appendix B ASCII Control Characters The table which follows shows the character sequences entered into Micro Manager to represent the special ASCII control characters In the table the Sequence column denotes the characters that should be entered to obtain the desired control characters When entering these sequences into the modem configuration strings for the computer side modem Sections 3 1 2 5 through 3 1 2 8 the caret character i e should be entered as the caret character i e you should not press the CTRL key and the specified key simultaneously The reason behind this was given in Section 3 1 2 on Modem Settings Alternatively when entering control sequences into the terminal window Section 4 1 6 the sequence is entered by pressing the CTRL key and the specified key simultaneously Sequence Character Decimal Octal Value Hexadecimal Description Name Value Value A SOH 1 001 0x01 Start of Header B STX 2 002 0x02 Start of Text SC ETX 3 003 0x03 End of Text D EOD 4 004 0x04 End of Transmission E ENQ 5 005 0x05 Inquiry F ACK 6 006 0x06 Acknowledge G BEL 7 007 0x07 Bell H BS 8 010 0x08 Backspace Ti HT 9 011 0x09 Horizontal Tab rI LF 10 012 0x0A Line Feed R VT 11 013 0x0B Vertical Tab A FF 12 014 Ox0C Form Feed z CR T3 015 0x0D Carriage Retu
49. can easily put data in desired target directories In the following example we will seek to output files to the top level directory E GPSDATA and then formulate a sub directory based upon year and month i e we will create the sub directory if it does not exist Within that sub directory we then attempt to formulate another subdirectory that is based upon the day of the month again we will create the sub directory if it does not exist For example if the receiver data being downloaded were collected on October 16 2001 we would want the following directory structure created E GPSData Oct01 DAY_16 To do this we created a batch file named MOVER BAT Its contents are as follows 66 RE RE DESCRIPTION RE This Batch file is intended to be used with the MicroManager RE Post Download commands It moves a single file from directory RE to another The name of the target directory is formulated from RE the year month and day of month passed via arguments to this RE batch file If the target directory does not exist it will create RE that directory sequentially RE RE PARAMETERS RE 1 gt THE FULL PATHNAME OF THE FILE TO BE MOVED RE 2 gt ROOT LEVEL OF THE TARGET RE 3 THE 2 DIGIT YEAR OF THE DATA START TIME RE 4 THE 3 CHARACTER MONTH OF THE DATA START TIME RE 5 gt THE 2 DIGIT DAY OF THE MONTH OF DATA START TIME RE RE EXAMPLE MICROMANAGER POST DOWNLOAD COMMAND IN MNEMONIC FORM RE D MicroMgr B
50. cancet_ Through this window you can configure the communication ports of the GPS receiver and any modem attached to the receiver The window is divided up unto two areas The first area deals with the communication speeds of each of the receiver s ports You can use the drop down list boxes to set the speed of each port individually Notice in the example window that there is an 128 Active flag next to the Port A field This flag is used to indicate the receiver port that is currently being used to communicate with Micro Manager This is important because if you change the communication speed of that port you may interfere with communication between Micro Manager and the GPS receiver When connected to the receiver by a modem you are strongly discouraged from changing the Active port communication speed because the effect on communications is modem dependent If you are directly connected to the GPS receiver i e not connected to the receiver via modem if you change the Active port and you press the Send button Micro Manager will issue the following prompt Communication Parameter Change than that of your computer Do you want this program to IN The BAUD you have selected for the receiver is different adjust your computer s BAUD to that set for the receiver If you answer No you can later issue a Poll Receiver Baud from the main menu of the program If you answer Yes then Micro Manager
51. command line mode Micro Manager makes no attempt to protect files already stored on disk If it generates a name for a file that is already stored on disk Micro Manager will overwrite that file when the named file is downloaded and provide no preventative screen messages This is consistent with the automated nature of the command line mode so beware The command line arguments follow the general form MicroMgr exe option_list secondary_args The options list and secondary arguments are as follows c num For automatic call and download of receiver data using a modem Here num represents the phone list entry number from the Telephone List window described in Section 3 1 3 If you are going to direct connect to the receiver using the command line mode you should not use the c option g hh h Automatically download files that have closed less than hh h hours prior to the current receiver time i e get the most recent files closed less than hh h hours ago Note this command line option cannot be used with the o option o hh h Automatically download files that have closed over hh h hours prior to the current receiver time i e get the files that have closed over hh h hours ago Note this command line option cannot be used with the g option d hh h Automatically delete downloaded files from receiver s memory Files over hh h hours old by time of closure will be deleted Note if the g and d options are both specifie
52. configured so that when the DTR line is dropped it signals the modem to terminate a telephone connection Therefore when using uZ CGRS receivers it is suggested that you connect the receiver s modem to Port A of the receiver When connecting a modem to a non uZ CGRS receiver or Ports B through D of a uZ CGRS receiver ensure that you configure the receiver to instruct its modem to ignore the DTR DSR signal See Section 4 1 5 4 3 For direct connections this is key because Micro Manager must be configured according to the availability of the DTR DSR flow control of the receiver or receiver port Section 3 1 1 3 5 describes the configuration of the DTR DSR hardware flow control for direct connections 2 2 Micro Manager Installation In this section we describe the installation of the Micro Manager software program and its ancillary programs and files For most users of Micro Manager the installation is very straightforward The installation uses an industry recognized installer program If for any reason you decide to remove Micro Manager such as to install an upgrade to Micro Manager it can be removed along with all of its support components using normal Windows 95 98 ME NT 2000 software uninstall mechanisms Please see the end of this section for details on uninstalling Micro Manager Please note that when installing Micro Manager on a Windows NT or Windows 2000 machine it is necessary to install Micro Manager under an account that h
53. day within that day Again the value stored for the leap seconds parameter from the last GUI run of the program will be used to convert UTC time tags to GPS time see Section E 3 1 2 175 Appendix F Utility Program UpackU12 F 1 Introduction to UpackU12 Thales Navigation s uZ Family of receivers maintains an internal data storage format that differs from normal processing files extracted from these receivers Normally users of these receivers process the Ashtech formatted B E and S Files or RINEX files However the Micro Manager program downloads the data from the uZ Family of receivers in the format stored by the receiver referred to as receiver image files As a result the downloaded receiver image files cannot be processed directly with normal processing packages UPackU12 EXE was designed to convert receiver image files extracted from the uZ Family receivers The program has been designed to operate on a Windows 95 98 ME NT and 2000 platforms To accommodate a wide variety of users UPackU12 can be configured and run through normal Windows Graphical User Interfaces GUI or launched directly from the command line That is a user can use the conversion program just like most other Windows programs or the converter program can be executed without need of human intervention from other programs such as Ashtech s Micro Manager Software from a DOS command line or from batch files UPackU12 currently supports the uZ Fa
54. decompressed files will have the same file name form and output directory as that of the U File The decompression program UpackU12 exe is supplied installed and made available for use when the installer for Micro Manager is used to install Micro Manager If you intend to use the decompression option of Micro Manager i e you check the subject checkbox then the program UpackU12 exe must be located in the same directory in which the MicroMgr exe program resides If UpackU12 exe is not there Micro Manager will generate an error message The Convert decompressed files to RINEX checkbox allows you to automatically convert the decompressed B E S and D Files to their RINEX counterparts for the Micro Manager Professional version D Files that contain meteorological data are used to create RINEX meteorological files Micro Manager performs this conversion by an automated call to XYZAshRx exe The automated call ensures that the created RINEX files will have the same file name form and output directory as that of the original U File This RINEX conversion program is supplied installed and made available for use when the installer for Micro Manager is used to install Micro Manager If you intend to use the RINEX conversion option of Micro Manager i e you check the subject checkbox then the program XYZAshRx exe must be located in the 110 same directory in which the MicroMgr exe program resides If XYZAshRx exe is not there Micro
55. drag the icon to the desktop and select Create Shortcut Here For details on how to add a program to the Start Menu consult Windows Help searching on Start Menu and selecting the topic dealing with adding menu items to the Start Menu Finally TRUMP is protected by a software sentinel key the same key as is used by Micro Manager The software sentinel key is installed by attaching the end of the sentinel key labeled AXCOMPUTER to a parallel printer port of your computer Tighten the screws of the sentinel key to connect the key securely to your computer If a printer was connected to your computer attach that cable to the sentinel If the sentinel cannot be installed because of an obstruction behind the computer you can place the sentinel key later in the parallel sequence for example you could attach the sentinel key to a DB 25 male to DB 25 female cable which is connected to your computer s parallel port H 3 RUNNING TRUMP TRUMP is designed to automate the process of converting Ashtech U Files into Raw Ashtech Observation files This program will at the user s option also create RINEX Version 2 0 files from these Raw Ashtech Observation files i e from Ashtech B Files The program can be manually instructed to convert files or can be called directly from the command line This latter method allows programs to invoke the converter without the need of human intervention 205 Throughout the remainder of this docu
56. ensure that Micro Manager does not attempt to obtain the status data immediately and will therefore not report the aforementioned start up errors when a receiver is not connected It is also important to note that if any of these status windows are displayed when any of the receiver interfacing windows see Section 4 1 5 become active then the status windows will 81 become disabled and will not update This is because Micro Manager disables all status updates during the interfacing activities described in Section 4 1 5 Once the interfacing windows are closed any visible status windows are then re activated and resume their normal updating operations 4 1 4 1 Diagnostic Message Window The Diagnostic Messages window displays real time textual messages providing information regarding current activities of Micro Manager Most messages are time tagged with the current CPU time i e not the current GPS time These time tags are enclosed within bracket characters i e and The following is an example of the Diagnostic Message window Diagnostic Messages If you have selected the Log File output option some or all of these messages will be written to the Log File see Section 3 1 6 2 4 1 4 2 Receiver Tracking Status Window The following is an example of the Receiver Tracking Status window The receiver tracking status display is based upon channel numbers which are shown across the top of t
57. fields correspond to the following output file names O Output RINEX Observation File Output RINEX GPS Navigation File Output RINEX GLONASS Navigation File XYZAshRx seeks to help with the file naming by keying off of the source B File name Each time the edit field of source B File is changed and contains a valid B File name i e the file exists on disk XYZAshRx will automatically fill in the other input file names for the files that exist on disk and will automatically create the output file names In the sample window above the user used the Browse button of the B File to select input B File and XYZAshRx found 164 associated E and S Files on the disk but not an associated I File and automatically named the output RINEX Observation and Navigation files In the input file table above notice that the S and I Files are optional When these files are not specified XYZAshRx automatically makes changes necessary to output header data in the associated RINEX files In particular when the S File is specified XYZAshRx sets certain default values for the output RINEX header based on data contained in the S File When the S File name is not provided the site related header data is obtained from and saved to the configuration file The RINEX header data affected by the presence of the S File are as follows Station Name Observer s Name Receiver Serial Number Antenna Serial Number Antenna Offsets Slant
58. format This is based upon a proprietary compression formulation To convert these files to normal receiver data files such as the Ashtech B E and 116 S Files you will need to run UpackU12 either automatically see Section 4 1 5 1 or manually see Appendix F It is important to note that if an image file is partially downloaded it will not be automatically decompressed or converted to RINEX Partially downloaded files occur when you press the Cancel button of this window or too many errors occur in the transfer Furthermore if you attempt to manually decompress partial receiver image files i e using UpackU12 the unpacking program will report checksum errors and only decompress a portion of that file 4 1 5 1 2 Deleting Selected Files To delete a given file or set of files select the appropriate file or files and then press the Delete button Upon pressing the Delete button Micro Manager issues a command to the receiver which will delete all selected files Micro Manager will then re request the directory listing of the receiver and re display that listing in the window described in Section 4 1 5 1 4 1 5 1 3 Download and then Delete Selected Files To download and then delete a given file or set of files select the appropriate files and then press the Download amp Delete button After doing so Micro Manager will begin the download of the selected files and will show the window described in Sect
59. is not in the list simply press the New Site button to create a new table entry for the site Upon doing so a prompt menu similar to the following will be displayed 43 Simply enter the 4 character site name and press the OK button Pressing the OK button creates a new entry in the RINEX Site Header Table 3 1 4 3 Common Header Tab of RINEX Configuration Window The following shows an example of the Common Header tab of the RINEX Configuration Window In this area one enters header data that is common among RINEX files e g RINEX Observation RINEX Navigation and RINEX Meteorological files The fields of this tabbed section are defined and described in the RINEX standard documentation a reference to which can be found in Appendix E 3 1 4 4 Observations Tab of RINEX Configuration Window The following shows an example of the Observations tab of the RINEX Configuration Window 44 laine D iit a er gael Pa toe bere Roe i Co T Ap na Notice that the Observation tabbed section contains three sub tabs 1 Positional Data 2 Header Data and 3 Options These three control the RINEX conversion parameters and header fields of the RINEX Observation files 3 1 4 4 1 RINEX Observation File Positional Data The RINEX Observation file header contains site positional data The conversion program i e XYZAshRx will be instructed as to how it should obtain the positional data Normally one will l
60. is pressed the window will have an appearance similar to the following The following table describes each of these checkboxes 46 CheckBox Description Output Epoch In the RINEX Observation header is an optional epoch Interval Header interval header Checking this checkbox will cause the RINEX converter to create such a header whenever an RINEX observation file for the site being configured is created Clock The clocks in some Ashtech receivers are permitted to drift at Adjustments in their normal rates As time progresses this drift normally Code and causes a larger separation between the receiver clock and the Carrier GPS time system When this drift reaches a predetermined magnitude e g 1 millisecond the receiver firmware will perform a local clock adjustment While this is a normal condition when one compares the current epoch of data with that of previous epochs one can see that the codephase observations exhibit a jump equal in magnitude to that of the clock adjustment The RINEX standard places restrictions on how one should handle this clock jump when creating RINEX observation files This checkbox controls two options related to this topic When checked the codephase and carrier phase observations output to the RINEX file will show this jump The clock offset will also show this jump but it will NOT accumulate the corrections in the clock offset field When unchecked the codephase observations ap
61. issuance of a command and the receipt of a reply before declaring a no response condition to the command If the network over which you will be communicating routes a high volume of traffic you may need to increase this number 194 Use Proxy The use of a Proxy Server is highly dependent upon your connection to the Server FTP Host Most FTP users will NOT need to enable the use of a proxy Proxy Server To determine your need of proxy servers please consult a Server network administrator for details and Proxy Port Enabling the Use Proxy Server checkbox enables the Proxy Server and Proxy Port fields The Proxy Server field should contain the name or IP address of a proxy server if access is being carried out via a proxy port The Proxy Port field should contain the port of the proxy server if one is being used ASCII Various systems such as UNIX and Windows store ASCII files in Transfer slightly different formats i e the End of Line and End of File markers Mode can differ When ASCII files are transferred between these systems special handling of these special characters must occur to translate them to the appropriate form on the receiving end Unfortunately many systems do not tag files as either ASCII or binary and the special characters that are in a typical ASCII file are also in binary files Therefore in order to translate ASCII files properly during upload download you must se
62. of stop bits used when communicating over the selected serial port To date all Ashtech receivers communicate using 1 stop bit The permissible values are 1 1 5 and 2 stop bits 28 3 1 1 3 4 Advanced Port Settings Use CTS RTS Hardware Flow Control The CTS RTS Hardware Flow Control checkbox allows you to specify whether or not the normal CTS RTS hardware flow control handshaking is enabled In most configurations this checkbox should be checked Those who uncheck this checkbox should have clear rationale as to why they should eliminate the CTS RTS hardware handshaking For example there are certain modems that do not employ the CTS RTS hardware handshaking In these cases Micro Manager needs to be made aware of the difference 3 1 1 3 5 Advanced Port Settings Use DTR DSR Hardware Flow Control The DTR DSR Hardware Flow Control checkbox allows you to specify whether or not the normal DTR DSR hardware flow control is enabled For direct connections with a GPS receiver See Section 2 1 you will need to alter this depending on the receiver type or the port of the particular receiver that will be used This is because there are some slight hardware variations between different models of uZ Family receivers With the exception of Port A of uZ CGRS receivers the DTR DSR hardware handshaking lines ARE NOT implemented As such Micro Manager must be configured according to the availability of the DTR DSR handshaking of the receiver or rec
63. only by an RTCM remote station The following table contains a description of each parameter displayed in the upper section of the RTCM Status Window Field Description RTCM Provides an indication of the RTCM mode of the receiver Mode Base Remote Off Type The RTCM message type of the most recent message sent Base mode or received Remote mode 90 Field Description Station ID The RTCM identifier of the reference station 0 to 1023 also known as the RTCM STID When the receiver is in Base mode this indicates the station ID of the receiver as an RTCM reference station When the receiver is in the Remote mode this field indicates the reference station from which the RTCM messages are being received Ref Health The health flag being reported by the Reference RTCM receiver When the receiver is an RTCM base station this value indicates the health that the station is broadcasting in its RTCM messages When the receiver is an RTCM remote station this value indicates the health of the participating reference station as is reported in the RTCM messages received from the participating RTCM base station Seq The RTCM Sequence Number SQNU attached to the RTCM messages being sent Base mode or received Remote mode Field under Type The field under the Type field represents the RTCM Synchronization Flag and is only reported when the receiver is participating as an R
64. performs a file name duplication check That is Micro Manager checks the output file directory see Section 3 1 6 3 to see if the file already exists If a duplicate name is detected Micro Manager will display a window indicating the duplication and present an opportunity to rename 109 the output U File i e the file that will contains an exact image of the file from the receiver s memory The following is an example of the Rename Output U File window Rename Output U File x Current Hame Hew Hame JUKENBA00 270 Site Name keme Session Code ja Year p Day of Year 270 Through this window you can edit the components used to create the U File name Appendix A describes the file naming convention employed by Micro Manager You can also force the rename of any U File before it is downloaded Simply click on the desired row which will highlight that row and then press the right mouse button A pop up menu will appear giving you the opportunity to rename the output U File At the top of the Receiver Files window are two checkboxes The Decompress files to Ashtech processing data file checkbox is used to control whether or not the B E S etc files will be created immediately following the download of the associated receiver file image U File Micro Manager will decompress the U File by using an automated call to UpackU12 exe see Appendix F The automated call ensures that the created
65. process These Met Files normally contain data collected by external sensors TRUMP has no way to verify this when the command is created If no Met File is created during the conversion process the post convert command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post convert command RXMF The name of RINEX Meteorological Data file created from the converted Ashtech data files does not include drive letter and pathname Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert Ashtech formatted files to RINEX files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message 2 Depending upon the receiver configuration an Ashtech Met File may not be output through the conversion process These Met Files normally contain data collected by external sensors TRUMP has no way to verify this when the command is created If no Met File is created during the conversion process the post convert command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post convert command The mnemonic will be translated to a single dollar character That is the dollar character is normally used to mark the start and end points of a mnemonic However the mnemonic means that the final translated command line command will contain an actual dollar character H 3 1 4 RIN
66. that follows shows one such case 181 BKEHBF00 273 ReEverntto Auto Hames IMKENBF00 273 The table that follows describes the contents of the Input file information Field Description Input File The name of the input file including drive and path of the receiver image file to be converted Sectors The number of 512 Byte sectors utilized by the image file These sectors are the file storage sectors of the receiver image as it resided in the receiver s memory not as stored on your disk Bytes The size of the image file in bytes not including the per sector overhead information stored as part of the file 182 Field Description Ordered This field was designed to provide a confidence level regarding the input file as an image file That is receiver image files are binary and follow a particular pattern This pattern is mostly contained in the sector information of the image file Image file sectors have a sorting order and are normally stored according to that sorting order However there are cases such as a full receiver image download operation which ignores the file boundaries where the sorting order may not follow the normal pattern For this reason we don t just ignore files that do not follow the typical sorting order Values displayed here are Value Description Sorted High confidence that the file is a true receiver image file Out or order w
67. the connection speed because with the newer modems the PC to modem speed can be independent of the speed over the other links Thus when the modem response string contains the word CONNECT we know that the connection was established NOTES 1 Consult the user s guide for your modem for specifics on configuring your modem 2 Consult Section 3 1 2 for specifics on entering special character sequences 3 1 2 8 Entering Editing the Miscellaneous Modem Configuration Items The Miscellaneous Modem Configuration Items are reached by selecting the Miscellaneous tab of the Modem Configuration window The following provides an example 36 A i E tomer 5 a Paskaiin Dadra Al Aeaaeai Rira iesirea pa imhen sepr bree jegearied remenem ieee beme j E o pemi Ga Being ten ie rjg arine prije DEDI seteer p bot pj wa E apami m O a eiaa jarga The first parameter i e the Line turn around time is probably the most important parameter affecting communication performance This parameter does not actually affect the configuration of the modem Rather it deals with the expected performance of the communication interface using this modem The parameter specifies the maximum amount of time between the issuance of a command to the remote receiver and receipt of a response to that command For example if you are using a spread spectrum radio modem that uses several repeater sites to reach the remote receiver the
68. the program Example 3 UpackU12 exe C D NBS5 REMOTE DAT UNBS5A99 010 P E TEMP In this example UPackU12 has been instructed to automatically convert the file D NBSS REMOTE DAT UNBS5A99 010 The output file name will automatically be generated based upon the receiver file information stored in the image file The output directory will be E TEMP 186 Appendix G Utility Program XY Zs_FTP G 1 Introduction to XYZs_ FTP XYZs_FTP EXE written by The XYZs of GPS Inc is a generalized FTP program with command line callable features The program was designed to operate on Windows 95 98 NT 2000 platforms To facilitate a wide variety of users XYZs_FTP can be configured and run through normal Windows Graphical User Interfaces GUD or launched directly from the command line In fact a user can use the program just like most other Windows programs or the program can be launched without need of human interaction by other programs such as Ashtech s Micro Manager Pro from a DOS command line or from batch files G 1 1 Minimum System Requirements XYZs_FTP requires that the target platform be a Windows 95 98 NT 2000 based computer While XYZs_FTP requires less than 1 megabyte of memory to run Windows 95 98 NT 2000 impose higher minimums Please consult the appropriate Microsoft documentation to determine the minimum system requirements for Windows XYZs_FTP requires less than 2 megabytes of disk space The program does cre
69. the receiver see Section 4 1 5 2 or load new firmware see Section 4 1 5 3 the receiver may not contain the necessary almanac information Once the receiver begins to track satellites however it can obtain the required almanac information for all GPS satellites from any 106 one satellite being tracked This almanac collection process can take up to 12 5 minutes or longer This is how long it takes to transmit one cycle of the entire broadcast message 4 1 5 Receiver Interfacing Windows The receiver interfacing windows are separate from the Status and Display Sub Windows described in Section 4 1 4 because they provide you with the ability to configure the receiver download data from the receiver delete data from the receiver and or upload firmware to the receiver These receiver interfacing windows can be activated through the use of the Receiver main menu option Upon selecting this option you will be presented with the following pull down menu All of the options of the pull down menu with the exception of the View Receiver Status option are directly related to these receiver interfacing windows The View Receiver Status option provides access to the windows described under Section 4 1 4 and is provided here to make a logical relationship with other receiver functions Selecting the first sub menu item i e Files will provide you with a window that permits download and deletion of fil
70. the remote s pseudorange observation as corrected by the correctors supplied in the Type 21 message 4 1 4 6 12 RTCM Type 22 Display RTCM Type 22 messages communicate corrections to the Base station position communicated in the Type 3 message These corrections in the Type 22 messages are to provide a more accurate position than can be reported in the Type 3 message The screen capture that follows shows an example display generated by Micro Manager to report RTCM Type 22 messages The display shows the last RTCM Type 22 message sent The following table contains a description of each parameter displayed in the RTCM East Longitude West Longitude and Type 22 message display Field Description Time Of The GPS time expressed as time of GPS day at which the Type 22 Message message was sent for Base station or received for Rover stations If the message is over a second old then the time will also contain an age display If such a message has not been sent or received then this field will contain None Received Station ID The RTCM Base Station ID contained in the Type 22 message Z Count The RTCM message Z Count ZCNT of the Type 22 message The RTCM Z Count is the time tag of the message and is displayed as seconds of the hour GPS time frame Ref Health The health flag being reported in the Type 22 message Seq The RTCM Sequence Number SQNU attached to the RTCM Type 22 message Posit
71. third warning occurs when the Micro Manager does not recognize an entered mnemonic i e the characters between two and including the characters The final warning occurs when you specify a working directory that does not exist on disk Note that even though a command contains a warning Micro Manager permits the acceptance and storage of that command If by run time the cause of that that warning is not corrected and that command is enabled Micro Manager will cancel all post download commands and will not permit any further running of post download commands Additionally Micro Manager can detect other warnings errors at run time When any such warnings errors are detected Micro Manager will display the rationale for the warning error in the Diagnostic Message Window echo that warning error in the Log File and terminate any and all post download commands for the current download operation The View button of this window is used to provide an example of the post download command as it would be translated during at the completion of a download operation Upon pressing the View button Micro Manager performs a cursory verification process on the mnemonic form of the command If the command fails this cursory verification then a warning message is displayed If however the command passes the verification a new window will be displayed The following is an example of such a displayed window lL z 8 ee EPOP
72. this approach because error conditions may arise during the command line i e unattended mode of the program When this occurs these windows will still be displayed and removed when the timer runs out The error condition will be written to the Log File see Section 3 1 6 2 and the Diagnostic Message Window see Section 4 1 4 1 Micro Manager can be configured to play a sound file when the alert or warning conditions occur A separate sound file can be played to distinguish the warning and the alert conditions Refer to Section 3 1 6 1 for more details on configuring Micro Manager to play sound files 4 1 1 4 Connection Status Information The lower status bar of the Micro Manager main window contains additional connection status information When a valid communication port has been opened the left most field of this area will contain the port connection information The center field of this area will contain an On line or Off line status Micro Manager is considered to be On Line when either the DSR 79 or RTS RS 232 status line indicators are active Otherwise Micro Manager is considered to be Off Line The right most field of the status bar reports whether or not Micro Manager is directly connected to the GPS receiver or connected to the receiver via modem This field also indicates whether or not Micro Manager recognizes a GPS receiver and if so what type of receiver is recognized 4 1 2 Connecting to the GPS Receive
73. to change the GPS receiver s parameters while Micro Manager is connected to the GPS receiver These will be described in later sections Earlier we stated that it is generally expected that Micro Manager be configured before it is actually connected to a receiver However whenever a valid communication port is specified in its configuration files Micro Manager will upon startup open that communication port and attempt to determine the type of receiver if any that is connected on that port For introductory users of this package this may be a somewhat confusing point However experienced users will 24 find this improves their productivity by requiring fewer steps to begin their work This topic will be described in more detail later in this document see Sections 3 1 1 3 1 6 5 and 4 1 2 3 1 1 PC Communication Port Settings The PC or Personal Computer Communication Port Configuration window allows the operator to set the communications port parameters governing the connection with the GPS receiver The items configured through this window affect the settings of the computer communication port over which Micro Manager is communicating with the GPS receiver and not the port settings of the GPS receiver see Section 4 1 5 4 3 The Communication Port Configuration window permits the editing of the following communication parameters 1 The PC communication port labeled Comm Port 2 The PC communication port speed label
74. unambiguous For this reason when the input file is an Ashtech D File the start time and Leap Second related prompts are disabled E 3 1 2 4 Specifying the Output RINEX Meteorological Data File The output file name is specified in one of 4 ways 1 The input meteorological data file name complies with the Ashtech naming convention 2 You cursor through or edit any of the Start Day of Data edit fields 3 You manually enter the output file name and 4 You use the Browse button next to the edit field pertaining to the output file name When either approach 1 or 2 is used the output file name will comply with the RINEX file naming convention for details on the file naming convention see the GBSS User s Manual To select the source meteorological data file simply type its name in the first prompt field provided or use the Browse button next to that field By pressing the Browse button you will be provided with a file selection window similar to that available in other Windows type programs E 3 1 2 5 Entering the RINEX Header Data After pressing the OK button of the window in which you specified the source and target files you will be provided with a window similar to the following RINEX Meteorological Header Data AAAA Station Humber XYZTT The XYZ s of GPS Test data collected for documentation purposes E o 1087589 2181 4880918 5164 3946968 8711
75. up Command Micro Manager will drop the RS 232 DTR line signal for approximately one half a second Again the Dialing Prefix Dialing Suffix and Hang up commands are modem strings subject to the same special characters discussed in Section 3 1 2 You will need to consult the user s guide for your modem to determine the settings of this window which are appropriate for your modem NOTES 1 Consult the user s guide for your modem for specifics on configuring your modem 2 Consult Section 3 1 2 for specifics on entering special character sequences 3 1 2 7 Entering Editing the Modem Response Parameters Due to the volume of possible modem response parameters the editable parameters span two tabbed sections of the Modem Configuration window The following provides an example of each SBA The first set of response parameters defines the general modem responses The second set deals more with modem responses sent when the modem successfully establishes a connection with another modem Each of the strings entered in this tabbed section are modem strings subject to the same special characters discussed in Section 3 1 2 You will need to consult the user s guide for your modem to determine the settings of this window that are appropriate for your modem The Command Complete and Command Error responses are important because they provide Micro Manager with the expected positive responses for both valid and erroneous commands
76. when testing your post download commands it is suggested that you enable the Log File The rationale for this suggestion is that the fully expanded i e translated command is written to the Log File Users can then cut and paste the command to a batch file and then test variations of the command in the batch file Again the Log File will contain the fully expanded commands for those commands that properly executed and any errors detected for those commands that failed to launch 3 1 5 2 Post Download Command Line Editor Window The Post Download Command Line Editor window allows one to edit post download commands and perform basic checks of the commands The following shows an example of this window 60 Ari Demmi naaa paaa x Fates re yeu ea i ke Caii a Pe hire Ge ry Pere T Maie Cece ood ator Pea Lea i cee Ea eg ea Ta cord Pilla Ehia mme oe drive mii peri LIESETTE Ha mete Lie Ple pas Dicbodes pull parti unr Tinh Geert heed Aleem Ci ime fied Ge mal entices i 1 1 i 1 iLi mE Tien enata EPS Oerprei pipa imme fee ideien ered pete l iFTENPi The mengd KPI Berja jon Pils mes Cincindas Pull pahi j Menpe 00 0 0 es Bange fore ber Waren Paris Wehin Coed Lec Note You can resize this window by grabbing its lower right corner and dragging the window to expand contract it There are basically four parts of a command line command 1 The command line command text in mnemonic form 2
77. 0 In the above example TRUMP will delay 30000 milliseconds or 30 seconds before running This form of the command line call to TRUMP is normally used when TRUMP is placed into the suite of programs started when Windows is started The delay is necessary to allow the sentinel drivers to fully initialize before TRUMP attempts to access them Failure to wait may cause TRUMP to terminate its automatic execution as it will receive an invalid response from the sentinel drivers If this should occur simply increase the amount of time provided through this command line call H 3 3 Networking Information TRUMP EXE was designed to automate manage the process of converting Ashtech U Files to Ashtech formatted raw GPS observation files and to Receiver INdependent EXchange RINEX files TRUMP was primarily designed to run in conjunction with Ashtech s iCGRS receivers where the receivers use a File Transfer Protocol FTP to push U Files to a computer network on which TRUMP resides With this goal it is likely that TRUMP will be communicating over a network connection with various systems and network drives Networks often implement restrictions through access levels and passwords to files directories and facilities such as creating and destroying files and directories In this section we seek to provide some general and cautionary information This information is general in that each network has its own character and attempting to list ev
78. 0 38400 57600 and 115200 3 1 1 3 Configuration Advanced Settings Pressing the Advanced button of the PC Communications Configuration window accesses the advanced communication settings Upon pressing this button you will be presented with a window similar to the following aod ff Dee CTSATS Hardware Flow Contra ee SS Hardwer Plow Conmbrod E Communication woune High Drest onna Torn fired Mir fimi Through this window the following items can be configured 1 Parity used in serial communications 2 Data Bits used in serial communications 3 Stop Bits used in serial communications 4 RS 232 control line handshaking 5 The level of Windows interaction and 6 Turn around wait time for direct connections 3 1 1 3 1 Advanced Port Settings Parity The Parity selection allows the operator to specify the parity mode used over the selected serial port To date all Ashtech receivers communicate using the no parity mode i e the None selection The permissible values are Even Odd Mark and None o 3 1 1 3 2 Advanced Port Settings Data Bits The Data Bits selection allows the operator to specify the number of data bits used when communicating over the selected serial port To date all Ashtech receivers communicate using 8 data bits The permissible values are 7 and 8 data bits 3 1 1 3 3 Advanced Port Settings Stop Bits The Stop Bits selection allows the operator to specify the number
79. 015 012 100 SPASHS RCI 15 0 015 012 1000 The interpreter translates the above file as follows SPASHS RCI 5 0 lt CR gt lt LF gt wait 100 milliseconds SPASHQ RID lt CR gt lt LF gt wait 100 milliseconds SPASHQ RAW lt CR gt lt LF gt wait 100 milliseconds SPASHS RCI 15 0 lt CR gt lt LF gt wait 1000 milliseconds 156 Appendix D Dialing Directory Export File Format Sections 3 1 3 through 3 1 3 7 of this document describe the process of exporting Micro Manager s dialing directory This section describes the format of these exported files The following is an example of an exported dialing directory file 0001 Site JK13 123 4567 115200 0 8 0 0002 Site JK23 123 4568 57600 0 8 0 0003 Site JK99 1 010 987 6543 38400 0 8 0 The general format of the dialing directory export file is ASCII text Each record within the file contains 3 lines of text The first line of each record is left justified while the remaining two lines are prefixed with 5 space characters The following describes the format of each record enum Name_of_Entry Telephone_Number BAUD Parity Data_bits Stop_bits With the exception of the field labeled enum each element of this record is described in section 3 1 3 2 Nevertheless a description of each is provided below 157 Field Max Characters Description enum 4 The record number The record numbers start at 1 an
80. 2A97 323 The list of options for the program can be combined in any order and are as follows O obsfile N navfile T path S smooth C change When neither the N nor the O options are specified XYZAshRx will automatically create the names of the output RINEX Navigation and Observation files Additionally in this case XYZAshRx will place these output files in the current working directory When either the N or the O parameters are specified XYZAshRx will only output the associated file type Some examples are listed below Example 3 XYZAshRx I BN102A97 323 EN102A97 323 SN102A97 323 Example 4 The converter uses the files BN102A97 323 EN102A97 323 and SN102A97 323 from the current working directory as the input B E and S Files respectively Because no O or N parameters were specified XYZAshRx will automatically name the RINEX observation and navigation output files The output files will be placed in the same directory as that of the B File which is the current working directory in this case XYZAshRx I BN102A97 323 EN102A97 323 O OBS DAT N NAV DAT The converter uses the files BN102A97 323 and EN102A97 323 from the current working directory as the input B and E Files respectively Because no S FILE was specified the converter will use the site related data stored in the program s configuration file for site related data Because the O parameter was sp
81. Any failures will be reported 4 1 5 4 1 Receiver Clock Parameters The uZ Family of receivers support the use of external clocks as well as an optional steering of the receiver s internal clock The Receiver Clock Controls window provides access to these receiver clock parameters Receiver Clock Controls x Clock Parameters Clock Mode External Cock E External Frequency fs Mhz z IV Internal Receiver Clock Steering F Send X Cancel Ashtech The table that follows describes the fields of the Receiver Clock Controls Parameter Description Clock Mode Describes the desired clock to be used Internal When the internal receiver clock will be used External When an external clock will be attached to the receiver and used Automatic Switch When the receiver will automatically switch to an external clock when one is detected but will use the internal receiver clock whenever an external clock is not detected External This field can only be edited when the Clock Mode parameter is set to either Frequency External or Automatic Switch This field is used to specify the frequency of the external clock Receiver This checkbox is used to specify whether or not the receiver internal clock Clock steering should be enabled when the internal receiver clock is used When Steering selected the receiver s internal clock will be steered such that its clock offset remains
82. C Anumabtaiy deter pce of Mode pee on ata ep O Aemet aby rman cep ciate winds on need care There are three parameters in this section The first parameter i e the Display the Background Bitmap checkbox when checked displays the program s background bitmap When unchecked the background bitmap will not be displayed It is important to note that changes made to this parameter will only have an effect once you restart the program i e you will need to terminate Micro Manager and then restart it for the change to take effect The second parameter i e the Automatically detect receiver or modem presence on start up checkbox defines two startup modes of Micro Manager In the first mode i e the checkbox is unchecked Micro Manager simply attempts to open the configured communication port see Section 3 1 1 Under the second mode Micro Manager attempts to detect the presence of a GPS receiver or modem attached to the configured communication port In this latter mode Micro Manager first attempts to detect the GPS receiver and if one is not detected then proceeds to detect the presence of a modem To detect a GPS receiver Micro Manager issues the Ashtech receiver port configuration command PASHQ PRT attempting all possible BAUD rates Upon receipt of a valid response to this query command Micro Manager has 74 established that it is connected to a valid Ashtech GPS receiver When detecting a modem the program us
83. EW ieee ne omen cree nearest or irate or eer er enee ATSA 13 1 1 Minimum System Requirements cccccccssscscscssssssssssssscssscssscsesssesssesesenees 15 1 2 Demo Modes of Micro Managel c cccccccscsssessresssssrsssssssssssssssssesseeassssssssssaes 16 2 0 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW oan pcakoe noe kann lien edad wane 17 2 1 Hardware Installation c cccccscscsscscssssssvssssssssssssssssssssssscssssssasacassssssssssssasseseees 17 2 2 Micro Marnager Installation cccccccccsscsssessssssscsssssscsvssssssssssseassssssssseseasasseees 19 2 2 1 The Installation ProcesSs esesesesesesesrsesesesossssssssssssssssssssseseeeeeeseseeeeeccececee 20 2 2 1 1 Installing the Sentinel Key eeeseneneneeeesesesesessseseacscececseseeeseseeeceeeesenensnseseeeeceees 22 2 2 1 2 Uninstalling Micro Mamager cccccccccscesesesssseseseseeeeseeeseecsesesesesecececacseceeeeneneeeeeeaees 22 3 0 CONFIGURATION OVER VIEW s sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessees 23 3 1 Configuration MCAUS seiccssarsiadescusnsre theo a 24 3 1 1 PC Communication Port Settings ccscsssssccssssssssscssssccsssccsssssssessssssssssesssssecens 25 3 1 1 1 Configuration Port Settings Comm Port ceeseseseceseceseseseseseececteeeeeeeeeseeeseenenes 27 3 1 1 2 Configuration Port Settings BAUD ceeseneneneesececeseseseseacsescecsceeeseeeseseseenene 27 3 1 1 3 Configuration Advanced Settings 0 0 cseccceseseenensnsesesesesesessssasacececseee
84. EX Configuration Window This window is identical to the RINEX Configuration Window found in Micro Manager except for the fact that TRUMP s configuration window gives the user the option to create RINEX files The Micro Manager window is described in detail in Section 3 1 4 e Configuring RINEX Site Header Tables of the Micro Manager Manual Please see that Section for details on this window H 3 1 5 Miscellaneous Configuration Options Window The Miscellaneous Configuration Options Window is displayed in response to the Miscellaneous selection from the program s Configuration menu The following provides an example of the Miscellaneous Configuration Options Window 221 Miscelanea Corgorain riptane ix Aled Sound Diagnoste Megs Miscellaneous E Play soumi file om Warming E Select Fle DM oaneSounds Barna Z Piy eni fin om Aber dE Select rie mMsumeSnmivi Alert wee EA pn Ashtech TRUMP is capable of playing audio WAV files when an alert or warning condition arises IT IS IMPORTANT TO NOTE THAT TRUMP DOES NOT CHECK TO ENSURE THAT A YOU HAVE A SOUND CARD AND B THAT YOUR SOUND CARD IS CAPABLE OF PLAYING WAV FILES If your computer does not have a sound card it is suggested that you not attempt to play any sounds i e that you leave the Play sound file on Warning and Play sound file on Alert checkboxes unchecked To play a sound file on the Warning condition ensure that the
85. GPSDATA SYYSS SMMMSS SDDS 3 D source MICROMGR PSTCMDEX BATCHES MOVER BAT SFPCFS E GPSDATA SYYSS SMMMSS SDDS 4 D source MICROMGR PSTCMDEX BATCHES MOVER BAT SFPDFS E GPSDATA SYYSS SMMMSS SDDSS 67 5 6 7 8 9 10 D sou D sou D sou D sou D sou D sou ree E GPSDATA rcee E GPSDATA ree E GPSDATA IC RO YYSS IC RO YYSS IC RO YYSS rce MIC YYSS E GPSDATA rce MIC YYSS E GPSDATA rcee IC RO RO RO E GPSDATA YYSS MQ UAN WA NWA NA NA PSTCMDEX BATCHES MOVER BAT SFPEFS S SDDSS PSTCMDEX BATCHES MOVER BAT SFPSFS S SDDSS PSTCMDEX BATCHES MOVER BAT SFPALMFS S SDDSS PSTCMDEX BATCHES MOVER BAT SFPRXOFS S SDDSS PSTCMDEX BATCHES MOVER BAT SFPRXNFS S SDDSS PSTCMDEX BATCHES MOVER BAT SFPRXMFS S SDDSS Notice that each of the Post Download Commands differs from the others in only one parameter i e the value that will be substituted for 1 within the batch file MOVER BAT In this case the parameter is the name file full path including drive that will be moved to the desired target directory The target directory is constructed from the latter 4 parameters of each post download command which are substituted in for 2 through 5 in the batch file when it exe
86. Micro Manager queries data for this window from the receiver 4 1 4 6 RTCM Status Window The RTCM Status window provides RTCM status information provided by the GPS receiver The appearance of the window and the general meaning of the parameters differ depending upon the RTCM mode of the receiver That is when the GPS receiver is configured as an RTCM base station see Section 4 1 5 4 8 the RTCM Status window displays status information about the base station and information about RTCM messages output by the base station When the GPS Receiver is configured as an RTCM remote station see Section 4 1 5 4 8 the RTCM Status window displays status information about the remote station and information about RTCM messages received by the remote station The receiver can also be configured such that its RTCM mode is disabled 1 e it is not an RTCM participant The RTCM Status window consists of two major sections The upper section of the window deals with RTCM status of the receiver and contains information about the most recently sent or received RTCM message depending upon base or remote RTCM mode of the receiver The lower section of the window provides information on each type of RTCM message sent or received by the receiver In the previous paragraph we indicated that the RTCM status windows display information about the RTCM message that was most recently sent or received by the GPS receiver When one of the RTCM status windows shows informat
87. NUAL DISCLAIMER THIS MANUAL IS PROVIDED AS IS THALES NAVIGATION MAKES NO WARRANTIES TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY WITH RESPECT TO THE SUBJECT MATTER CONTENTS OR USE OF INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR ANY DERIVATIVES THEREOF THALES NAVIGATION DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE NONINFRINGEMENT AND TITLE FURTHER THALES NAVIGATION DOES NOT WARRANT GUARANTEE OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THIS MANUAL IN TERMS OF CORRECTNESS ax ACCURACY RELIABILITY OR OTHERWISE THIS PUBLICATION AND FEATURES DESCRIBED HEREIN ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS The Software Program and Documentation are provided with RESTRICTIVE RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by or on behalf of the United States government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision c 1 Gi of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or subdivision 9 C 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights 48 CFR 52 227 19 as applicable Should you have any questions concerning this Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Liability please contact in writing Thales Navigation Legal Department 471 El Camino Real Santa Clara CA 95050 USA INDEX 0 0 MICRO MANAGER vs MICRO MANAGER PRO vvisessssssssssceseseseesvee 11 1 0 OVERVI
88. Offset Per Day give the user a second choice the capability to slide the daily sessions in a manner which retains constant geometry We previously stated that the Sess Progr Mode can take on the values of Disabled Enabled or Sleep Mode We have already discussed the Disabled and Enabled modes but have not presented the Sleep Mode The only difference between the Enabled and Sleep Modes is that much of the receiver s boards are shut down between sessions to conserve power These boards will be reactivated a few minutes before the session is scheduled to come active to allow the receiver to fully acquire any satellites visible to the receiver The power will also be reactivated when the receiver is connected to a modem and an incoming telephone call is detected The table that follows describes the fields of the session entries 133 Column Title Description Sess Not editable The single character session code of the session When the receiver reports an active session i e currently recording data under that session Micro Manager in turn displays that active session by surrounding the session code with lt lt and gt gt In the example screen display above the receiver indicated that session 19 was active Use A check in a Use box indicates that the receiver will use the entered session Start Time The start time of the session
89. Play sound file on Warning checkbox is checked and you use the associated Select File to select the desired WAV file Upon making your file selection TRUMP will test play that selected sound file To play a sound file on the Alert condition ensure that the Play sound file on Alert checkbox is checked and you use the associated Select File to select the desired WAV file Upon making your file selection TRUMP will test play that selected sound file When either a warning condition or an alert condition exists TRUMO will attempt to play the selected sound files repeatedly with about a 2 second cycle time While TRUMP will play sound files longer than 2 seconds you are advised to keep your warning and alert sound files shorter than 2 seconds 222 Micelles Ciedigeratiim Oiana Bik Alen Sounds Disgresic Mags Miscellaneous E ript dlagnostic message fog fhe 2 AILO T Wre verbose diagnostic messages to log File D Display verbose diagnostic messages Log Fie Gutput Path When the Output diagnostics message log file checkbox is checked the Log File will be written to the directory specified under the Log File Output Path text box on this window Also when checked diagnostic messages will be written to the Log File Some of these diagnostic messages may not be of interest to some users For this reason you are provided a means of reducing the diagnostic messages to ones that are critical Th
90. Radius and Delta Vertical Obviously the above information would be obtained from the S File if it where present Note The S File does not contain all of the antenna offset information but only the slant height The S file assumes that an antenna of a particular radius is being used It is recommended that the S file not be used as input for the RINEX header if there is an antenna height value in the S file since this will lead to erroneous entries in the RINEX header Instead the antenna height information should be entered into the RINEX Header Data Options window Similarly the presence of the I File affects the header of the output RINEX Navigation File For GLONASS RINEX conversions the I File is required When the I File is present XYZAshRx places the ionospheric header data containing the model alphas and betas and the leap second header data i e the data needed to determine the integer offset between GPS time and UTC into the RINEX Navigation File When the I File is not present these header components will not be output to the RINEX Navigation File Notice that in the output file table above the output RINEX Navigation and Observation files appear to be both optional and required This is because at least one of the output files is required by XYZAshRx Once the file names are entered simply press OK and a window allowing you to edit change the header data will be displayed See Section E 3 1 1 1 E 3 1 1 1 RINEX Header
91. S Later when TRUMP creates the given directory the GPS week for example 1149 will be substituted for the GPWS mnemonic That is the mnemonics of the directory name are first translated If in the end the expanded directory does not exist then TRUMP will create it In this example the directory would be translated as follows C 1149 The following is a list of the mnemonics and their descriptions as of the time this section was written that were implemented within TRUMP for directory naming Description Single character session code as extracted from the name of the receiver U File name RXSSC _ RINEX Session Code This will be a single character when 8 3 RINEX file naming format is selected and 3 characters when the 10 3 RINEX naming format is selected For the 10 3 form this session code will be equivalent to the portion of the RINEX name described in Appendix A 4 Character Site Name as extracted from the name of the receiver U File name GPWs GPS Week of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File 212 Description by the contents of the U File contents of the U File GPSE Seconds of GPS Week of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File YS The last digit of the year of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File YE The last digit of the year of the end
92. Section 4 1 4 6 8 for a description of these fields The primary difference between Type 18 and 20 messages is that Type 18 messages contain uncorrected carrier phase observations while Type 20 messages contain corrections to the carrier phase observations Micro Manager in its Corrected Carrier field displays the remote s carrier phase observation as corrected by the correctors supplied in the Type 20 message 4 1 4 6 11 RTCM Type 21 Display RTCM Type 21 messages communicate RTK Pseudorange Corrections That is corrections to the pseudorange observations The screen capture that follows shows an example display generated by Micro Manager to report RTCM Type 21 messages The display shows the last RTCM Type 21 message sent 103 24155594 900 24155602 300 24096707 400 24096714 780 21019184 680 21019189 580 21728502 560 21728505 460 elelelelelelclo NWN NWN For Type 21 messages the displayed fields and their meanings with the exception of the Corrected Range column have the exact same meaning as that discussed for Type 19 messages and therefore you should refer to Section 4 1 4 6 9 for a description of these fields The primary difference between Type 19 and Type 21 messages is that Type 19 messages contain uncorrected pseudorange observations while Type 21 messages contain corrections to the pseudorange observations Micro Manager in its Corrected Range column displays
93. T and 2000 platforms These features provide the user with a stable and secure platform that requires minimal maintenance Micro Manager should run equally well on Windows XP Micro Manager currently supports the Ashtech uZ Family of GPS receivers This includes the uZ CGRS and uZ Surveyor receivers It has been designed to allow both direct connections i e via RS 232 cables to the GPS receiver and remote connections through modems Micro Manager offers extensive modem configuration options and as such will support a wide variety of modems Furthermore the modem configuration options support a wide variety of installation needs For example one installation of Micro Manager is configured to use a spread spectrum modem That modem employs a TDMA network access scheme and utilizes several repeaters to reach some of the remotely located receivers Without the availability of the extensive configuration options such an installation may not have been possible Micro Manager is capable of exploiting the following major features of the uZ Family of GPS receivers 1 GPS data collection and data file storage 2 GPS data collection configuration parameters including satellite filtering and site information 3 Session programming features aiae 4 Receiver communication port configuration 5 RTCM configuration and control 6 Remote Firmware Uploading 7 Parameters which control the protocol used in the transfer of GPS data 8
94. TCM remote site The flag is used to indicate synchronization with the RTCM messages The three possible values and their meanings are as follows Value Description No Msg No RTCM Messages have been received Not Sync The RTCM Messages are not synchronized i e the received RTCM message appears to be older than the maximum RTCM age parameter see Section 4 1 5 4 8 Sync The received RTCM messages are synchronized and fit within the maximum age parameter see Section 4 1 5 4 8 Z Count The RTCM message Z Count ZCNT The RTCM Z Count is the time tag of the message and is displayed as seconds of the hour GPS time frame QA The communication quality factor and is displayed enabled only when the receiver is a participating RTCM remote station This factor is defined as 100 times the number of good messages divided by the total number of messages Age Used in remote mode to indicate the age in seconds of the received RTCM messages As with all other windows in the program Micro Manager will show the units of a displayed field if you rest the cursor over that field for a couple of seconds Also please see the Section 4 1 4 note on how Micro Manager queries data for this window from the receiver Section 4 1 5 4 8 describes the Micro Manager window used to configure the receiver RTCM mode The following subsections provide a description of the lower portion of the RTCM Status Window In each
95. TEI API The Diagnostic Messages window displays real time textual messages providing information regarding current activities of TRUMP Note Any message that is displayed in this window will also be recorded in the Log file H 3 1 2 Directories Window The Directories window is displayed in response to the Directories selection from the program s Configuration menu Through this window one selects the sets of directories to be searched for U files That is when TRUMP is commanded to begin processing see Section H 3 1 these directories will be searched for the arrival of new U files Once found these files will be processed The output files created by this processing will be placed into the target directories defined through this window The following provides an example of the Directories window 209 By selecting the New or Edit buttons the Edit of an U File Search Directory window is displayed 210 Edit of an U File Search Directory A Alee Search Dir intestata Browse JOT RUMP tsion SS55SS 07 VV SHOES EMMMSS F005 Brower Rime Guipa Dineebory kU RUMP tet ood SSSA VY SE REN SMM DOSE rosera Praceased UFiles Binet ony JO RUMP st ot SSS SSE TY SEU ILES EMMMSE FOOSE Brovwes FREGCE Th ssien code used for MINEN fil mines PESEE 4 Character Fitt Fame FGPWSF GPE Week of data start FCPS ee Secon
96. TEMA I IPPEEDEN CHER Watkin E pam T pr e Mi Wal be Pen raerimed e emt ggiets bebe maing Pee eee animea al The meari 0 Pile Pile mae ie diive mi pete WPRLUAFL Te coeweted ieee Fila pee toneledes fuli pee The metei dimen Fila meee joe hee mi eects Tib Basikal KIES Jieidi Vaici CLL imma id Le ll eee FREE Tien coemiiaed EEG Wivigeicien Vide meen Cisdlisdee Fill pa ij EEO Biu peu lt Monge 1 ber Were harin Wri eremi Loe ED Rides he Pe ae w rey i Were eee ha i 3 1 5 3 Micro Manager and Post Download Commands The purpose of this section is to provide miscellaneous information regarding the Post Download command feature of Micro Manager Before continuing with the discussion it is important for the reader to understand what it means for a command to be completed The completion of a command is dependent upon the perspective from which you view the command That is from the perspective of the operating system i e Windows a command is viewed as completed when the program actually finishes However there are cases where the command will be completed from the Micro Manager perspective even though it has not completed from the perspective of Windows For example if the Post Download Command Line Editor window dialog item Wait for this command to complete before issuing the next command was NOT checked for a command when Micro Manager launches the command it will not wait for
97. Thales Navigation Presents Miqco Manage MiaoManage Pro Receiver Management and Control Software for the Ashtech uZ Family of GPS Receivers Version 2 0 User s Manual January 16 2003 Printed in the United States of America by The XYZs of GPS Inc XYZs Part Numbers Micro Manager Version 2 0 xyzgps12 h0A Micro Manager Pro xyzgps12 hl1A Ashtech Part Numbers Micro Manager 110918 Micro Manager Pro 110449 January 16 2003 Trademark Notices MicroMgr and Micro Manager and u Manager and u Mgr are trademarks of The XYZs of GPS Inc All other product and brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Ashtech is a registered trademark of Thales Navigation Inc XYZs of GPS is a registered trademark of Dr Benjamin W Remondi SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT BY OPENING THE SEALED DISK PACKAGE CONTAINING THE SOFTWARE MEDIA OR INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT CONSTITUTES THE COMPLETE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU LICENSEE AND THALES NAVIGATION LICENSOR CAREFULLY READ THE AGREEMENT AND IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS RETURN THIS UNOPENED DISK PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS TO THE PLACE WHERE YOU OBTAINED THEM FOR A FULL REFUND LICENSE LICENSOR grants to you a limited non exclusive non transferable personal license License to i
98. The FREQ fields are only enabled when configured as an RTCM base Message Contains the RTCM Message up to 80 characters sent as part of the RTCM Type 16 message from the Base station to the user equipment It is important to note that Micro Manager supports the configuration and display of the uZ Family of GPS receivers participating as RTCM remote receivers At the time of the publication of this document Thales Navigation had not fully tested the support of the uZ Family receivers as RTCM remote stations in the Micro Manager environment Thus when you make the Remote RTCM selection Micro Manager reports the following warning message RTCM Option WARNING x Currently the configuration parameters for an RTCM Remote receiver are not fully supported You are STRONGLY urged not to use this receiver option 4 1 5 4 9 Satellite Tracking Window The Satellite Tracking Window allows you to alter the set of GPS satellites that the receiver is permitted to track Below is an example of this window 143 Receiver Satellite Tracking Selection Window kaikai ika kaika kaika dIddd00 kaika kaikai ika ikala kaika kalka ika ika fka ika kaika You can enable disable the tracking of specific satellites by checking or unchecking the checkbox of the desired satellite listed by pseudo random noise code numbers As with the other receiver configuration windows
99. Type 6 Display RTCM Type 6 messages are the RTCM Null Frame messages These messages contain no parameters and are used as a transmission fill According to the RTCM standard they are used to provide messages when the Reference Station has no other messages ready to be sent The screen capture that follows shows an example display generated by Micro Manager to report RTCM Type 6 messages The display shows the last RTCM Type 6 message sent Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 6 Type 9 Type 15 Type 16 Type 18 Type 19 Type 20 Type 21 Ty gt Time Of Message fi7 39 34 00 Station ID fz Z Count 2385 6 Ref Health po Seq E Ho Message Body in a Type 6 Message i e the RTCM Hull Message The following table contains a description of each parameter displayed in the RTCM Type 6 message display Field Description Time Of The GPS time expressed as time of GPS day at which the Type 6 Message message was sent for Base station or received for Rover stations If the message is over a second old then the time will also contain an age display If such a message has not been sent or received then this field will contain None Received Station ID The RTCM Base Station ID contained in the Type 6 message Z Count The RTCM message Z Count ZCNT of the Type 6 message The RTCM Z Count is the time tag of the message and is displayed as seconds of the hour GPS time frame 95
100. UMP s Post Convert Commands 216 Description Single character session code as extracted from the name of the receiver U File name RXSSC _ RINEX Session Code This will be a single character when 8 3 RINEX file naming format is selected and 3 characters when the 10 3 RINEX naming format is selected For the 10 3 form this session code will be equivalent to the hmm portion of the RINEX name described in Appendix A 4 Character Site Name as extracted from the name of the receiver U File name contents of the U File by the contents of the U File contents of the U File by the contents of the U File YS The last digit of the year of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File YE The last digit of the year of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File YYS The last two digits of the year of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File Y YES The last two digits of the year of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File contents of the U File contents of the U File RINEX files MMS The 2 digit month of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File MME The 2 digit month of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File MMMS _ The 3 character mont
101. a Char Yaar Tai PVT tr TRUMP arg insiens Char Veer LHO frrrt TATA arg iesene Aebtech Oupa Path Hd WP AOPE m aj aj oe om cav tm i mo st mat iech Post Convert commands allow one to specify special programs that may need to be called once files are converted Through this mechanism TRUMP can pass information to those programs using their command line parameters That is any program that you choose that will act upon data files created by or information from within TRUMP can perform special processing on the files created by TRUMP provided that these programs are command line driven H 3 1 3 1 Editing Post Convert Commands TRUMP allows one to specify programs to be called at the completion of a conversion process of each receiver U File found in the U File Search Directory see Section H 3 1 2 Post Convert commands once configured will be executed AFTER the completion of the conversion process for that U File and before converting the next U File This of course assumes that no errors occurred in the conversion move process i e Post Convert commands will not be run when certain errors occur in the conversion process Through this feature one can have TRUMP pass information from within TRUMP to other programs For example you can have TRUMP call an FTP program to distribute all of the files just converted to several Internet FTP sites This simple feature provides you with a very powerful system integration
102. a for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file YYS The last two digits of the year of the start of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file Y YES The last two digits of the year of the end of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file The 4 digit year of the start of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file YYYYE The 4 digit year of the end of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file RXYY The last two digits of the year of the start of the data used in naming any RINEX files The 2 digit month of the start of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file The 2 digit month of the end of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file MMMS The 3 character month name of the start of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to
103. a the command line and they both attempt to connect to the same host FTP site Often these sites allow only one connection on a given account Therefore a race condition ensues and only one will be successful To overcome this we have implemented two features in XYZs_FTP 1 the re connection parameters described in Section G 3 1 1 2 1 and 2 the Q command line parameter The Q command line parameter enables what is termed a master slave mode within XYZs_FTP Accordingly the first occurrence of XYZs_FTP to be run using the Q command line parameter will become the master Any others that use the Q command line parameter will become a slave to the master In this relationship the slave will submit its FTP requests inclusive of account information to the master for processing The master accepts these requests and places them into a queue of FTP operations to be performed The slave then terminates leaving the master to process and handle each queued FTP operation one by one When the master has completed processing the queued requests it then enters a dormant state i e it does not terminate and awaits further requests by any slaves The master stays resident as long the operator does not terminate it or the system is not shut down 201 Thus if it is desired that multiple programs launch and exercise XYZs_FTP functions it is recommended that each and every occurrence use the command line call containing the Q parameter When t
104. ach Before continuing it is important to re state that the S File and I File inputs are optional However the I File is required when converting GPS GLONASS data files As is discussed in Section E 3 1 1 the absence or presence of the S File and or the I File affects header data that is output to both the RINEX Navigation and Observation Files Please consult Section E 3 1 1 for the specifics in this area as they also apply under the Command Line approach The general form of the command line call to XYZAshRx is as follows XYZASHRX EXE I Dfile efile sfile ionfile options Notice that you are minimally required to use the I option and specify the names of the B and E Files parameters bfile efile respectively All items enclosed in and are optional For example the names of the S File and I File are optional When specifying the input file names it is assumed that either the current working directory contains the source data files or the full path to the files is specified as part of each file name For example the following call assumes that the input B E and S Files come from the current working directory Example 1 XYZAshRx I BN102A97 323 EN102A97 323 SN102A97 323 In the following example the B file comes from the directory D BDATA and the S file comes from the directory E EDATA notice that no S File is specified 172 Example 2 XYZAshRx I D BDATA BN102A97 323 E EDATA EN10
105. after the drive letter 52 Description The name of the raw receiver file just downloaded includes full drive name path UF The name of the raw receiver file just downloaded does not include drive letter and pathname FPBF The name of the B File converted from the downloaded receiver file includes full path See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert downloaded receiver files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message BF The name of the B File converted from the downloaded receiver file does not include drive letter and pathname See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert downloaded receiver files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message FPCF The name of the C File converted from the downloaded receiver file includes full path See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert downloaded receiver files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message Depending upon the receiver configuration a C File may not be output through the conversion process M
106. ager to other programs For example you can have Micro Manager call an FTP program to distribute all of the files just collected and or converted to several Internet FTP sites 49 This simple feature provides you with a very powerful system integration capability that exploits programs supporting command line parameters or scripting Before continuing however it is important to state that the Post Download Command feature provides users with great flexibility and power With this flexibility and power comes the potential for users to incorrectly call programs external to Micro Manager This is because Micro Manager has NO knowledge of correct vs incorrect calls to external programs and cannot therefore provide any checks of correctness before the calls to these external programs are actually made In short only advanced knowledgeable users should exploit the Post Download Command feature Presented in Section 3 1 5 3 of this document is an additional set of warnings regarding the Post Download Command feature that should be reviewed Basically a post download command is a call to an external program using a command line structure That is many programs can be run automatically through command line arguments For example to run the MS DOS version of PKZIP one normally types something like the following at the MS DOS prompt PKZIP MYZIPDAT UREMDA99 123 When PKZIP is called in this way all of the information it needs is provided
107. ame port that Micro Manager is using to communicate with the receiver This is because the messages exchanged between Micro Manager and the receiver are not compatible with RTCM messages 140 Thus to begin configuring the RTCM capabilities of the receiver you must first change the receiver s RTCM Port to something different than what is being used by Micro Manager Likewise the receiver will not permit you to set the RTCM port to the port configured for remote connections i e the port on which the receiver s modem is attached and configured If you do set the RTCM Port to either of these two ports and you press the Send button the receiver will not accept the values and Micro Manager will give an error message indicating that the configuration values just sent to the receiver do match those reported by the receiver in its confirmation message The table that follows describes the parameters of these windows in more detail Later we will provide restrictions imposed by these parameters Parameter Description RTCM Mode The current RTCM mode of the GPS receiver Base Remote or Off When the receiver is configured as an RTCM Base station the position of the antenna must be entered into the receiver To enter these parameters you can press the Reference Position button Upon doing so the position entry window described in Section 4 1 5 4 4 will be displayed If you fail to supply a referenc
108. an error or becomes confused At that point the recipient will send the sender a special packet that tells the sender where in the file transfer it lost track The sender upon receiving this information will start the transfer back at the point specified by the recipient To safeguard against the potential for the loss of the recipient s stream interruption signal the protocol also permits a negotiated synchronization point That is at various and predetermined points during the transfer of large files the sender and receiver of the data streams agree that streaming will be halted so that both the sender and receiver can acknowledge their progress to one another The Synchronization Window Size parameter is used to govern how often in number of packets this synchronization process occurs The smaller the number the more frequent these synchronization events occur This parameter like most other parameters controlling the Z Modem protocol should be altered only by advanced users 72 The Inter Frame Timeout parameter governs the maximum amount of time in seconds between two consecutive packets in the transfer This parameter is another that helps to safeguard against confusion in the protocol transfer During the transfer communication errors induced in the communication medium e g static in the telephone lines can cause the loss of packet information In these instances the recipient can become confused and not recognize
109. an example Micro Manager serial number KF004561 MICROM 011598 The first 8 characters of the serial number are the numbers that should be entered during the installation process In the above example the Micro Manager serial number that one would enter is KF004561 Please note that without the proper serial number you will not be able to continue the Micro Manager installation 21 During the installation of the Micro Manager program and data files you will be asked two questions 1 Do you want a Micro Manager entry in the Windows Start Program menu 2 Do you want a shortcut to Micro Manager on your desktop Answering no to either question does not prohibit you from later manually activating or deactivating the features Likewise answering yes to either question will not prohibit you from manually deactivating the features Manually activating and deactivating these features can be accomplished through standard Windows configuration parameters such as creating shortcuts at any later time If you decide to add Micro Manager to the Windows Start Program menu then you will be able to quickly launch Micro Manager using the Windows Start button If you choose to have a Micro Manager shortcut added to your desktop then the installer will place the program icon onto your desktop To launch the program from the desktop you will simply need to double click the program icon In both cases the link to the program is installed without
110. any additional command line parameters i e double clicking the program icon will place the program into its GUI mode rather than its command line mode 2 2 1 1 Installing the Sentinel Key Before actually running Micro Manager you will need to install the software sentinel key Please note that Micro Manager will not run without this sentinel key Also note that you cannot start Micro Manager with the key and then later remove the key while Micro Manager is running The software sentinel key is installed by attaching the end of the sentinel key labeled ACOMPUTER to a parallel printer port of your computer Please tighten the screws of the sentinel key to securely connect the key to your computer If a printer is connected to your computer attach that cable to the sentinel If the sentinel cannot be installed because of an obstruction behind the computer you can place the sentinel key later in the parallel sequence for example you could attach the sentinel key to a DB 25 male to DB 25 female cable which is connected to your computer s parallel port To ensure a good connection between the computer the sentinel key and other parallel devices use only IEEE standard parallel printer cables The sentinel key allows Micro Manager to run on a single workstation As stated earlier multiple copies of Micro Manager can be run on a single workstation without need of additional keys 2 2 1 2 Uninstalling Micro Manager Micro Manager and all of i
111. any packet information This parameter indicates the maximum amount of time the recipient will stay confused before asking the sender to start sending from a designated point on the file During a Z Modem file transfer the sender and receiver may need to send specialized commands The exact purposes of these commands are not important for this discussion as they relate to how the transfer functions and what information is exchanged The recipient of these commands has a specified amount of time to respond to these commands i e the Frame Command Response Timeout This parameter like most other parameters controlling the Z Modem protocol should be altered only by advanced users Thus far we have discussed the protocol transfer parameters and what they mean We have cautioned against changing most of the parameters We have not cautioned against changing the Transfer Block Size parameter simply because this parameter can affect the overall throughput of your file transfers The Transfer Block Size parameter indicates how many actual data bytes i e no overhead bytes will be included in each packet The larger the packet the more susceptible an individual packet is to errors induced in the communication medium Remember that the Z Modem protocol operates on a streaming basis This is important because by the time the recipient detects a block error the sender is already sending the next packet of information By the time t
112. as full administrative privileges such as the Administrator s account If you attempt to install Micro Manager under an account that does not have full administrative access Micro Manager will not install and run properly This is because the Micro Manager installer needs to add device drivers for its sentinel key During the installation of Micro Manager the following major components will be installed Micro Manager Program files Sentinel Drivers Micro Manager Sound Files Micro Manager Ancillary Support Program Files The program files include the executable program and its configuration files The sentinel drivers are required to allow Micro Manager to communicate with its sentinel key In fact without these drivers Micro Manager would not be expected to run This sentinel key comes standard with each copy of the program The sentinel key allows Micro Manager and its support utilities 19 to run on a single workstation Please note that multiple copies of Micro Manager can be run on a single workstation based upon a single sentinel key i e without the need of additional sentinel keys Furthermore there is virtually no limit to the number of remote receivers that can be controlled using a single copy of the program The Micro Manager sound files are a set of WAV files that Micro Manager can be configured to play when certain events occur see Section 3 1 6 1 The user selects which sound files to play in each situation dur
113. at a time You may not operate the Program in a time sharing or service bureau operation or rent lease sublease sell assign pledge transfer transmit electronically or otherwise dispose of the Program or Documentation on a temporary or permanent basis without the prior written consent of LICENSOR You agree not to translate modify adapt disassemble decompile or reverse engineer the Program or create derivative works of the Program or Documentation or any portion thereof Pr TERMINATION The License is effective until terminated The License will terminate without notice from LICENSOR if you fail to comply with any provision of this Agreement Upon termination you must cease all use of the Program and Documentation and return them and any copies thereof to LICENSOR GENERAL This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the Laws of the State of California and the United States without regard to conflict of laws provisions thereof and without regard to the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods Unless modified in writing and signed by both parties this Agreement is understood to be the complete exclusive and final agreement between the parties superseding all prior agreements oral or written and all other communications between the parties relating to the Software Program and Documentation No employee of Thales Navigation or any other party is authorized to make any agreem
114. atches Mover bat FPBF E GPSDATA YYS MMMS DDS RE WHICH WILL BE TRANSLATED AS FOLLOWS BY THIS BATCH PROGRAM RE D MicroMgr Batches Mover bat FPBF E GPSDATA MMMS YYS DAY_ DDS RE RE SPECIAL NOTES RE 1 WE FIRST ATTEMPT TO MAKE DIRECTORIES IF THEY ALEARDY EXIST THE RE mkdir COMMAND WILL FAIL BUT THIS BATCH WILL NOT RE 2 WE WILL FIRST COPY THE FILE FROM THE SOURCE TO THE TARGET AND RE THEN DELETE THE SOURCE FILE THE RATIONALE IS SIMPLY TO ENSURE RE THE SOURCE FILE IS moved WITHOUT NAME CONFLICTS RE mkdir 2 mkdir 2 4 3 mkdir 2 4 3 DAY_ 5 copy 1 2 4 3 DAY_ 5 del 1 Notice that there are only 5 executable lines within this batch file i e the last five lines The remaining lines document the file It is suggested that if you are interested in this example you read the batch file documentation Notice though that there are three make directory commands i e mkdir These commands create each directory and sub directory in sequence If the directory already exists no harm is done as the mkdir command will fail but the batch program will not Now let us look and the command line calls in Micro Manager mnemonic form 1 D source MICROMGR PSTCMDEX BATCHES MOVER BAT SFPUFS E GPSDATA SYYSS SMMMSS SDDS 2 D source MICROMGR PSTCMDEX BATCHES MOVER BAT SFPBFS E
115. ate provides an indication of the effective throughput in bytes per second of the file transfer These numbers are provided only as status information that lets you know that Micro Manager and the GPS receiver are communicating data File Time Remaining This field provides an estimated time to complete the transfer of the current file that is based upon the data transferred thus far and the time required to transfer that data Sometimes you may see this estimated time suddenly change This IS normal and CAN be caused by such factors as communication delays noisy communication lines delays caused by the handshaking mechanisms of the file transfer protocol and recovery from transfer errors Total Time Remaining This field provides an estimated time to complete the transfer of all selected files that is based upon the data transferred thus far and the time required to transfer that data Sometimes you may see this estimated time suddenly change This IS normal and CAN be caused by such factors as communication delays noisy communication lines delays caused by the handshaking mechanisms of the file transfer protocol and recovery from transfer errors Status This field provides a short text description of what the protocol transfer is doing and any errors it is trying to recover from The downloaded files are stored in the Ashtech U File format The U File format is also referred to as the uZ Receiver image
116. ate ASCII output log files that contain a diagnostic tracking history of FTP sessions however the size of these files is normally very small e g less than 200K per day A valid software sentinel key must also be present XYZs_FTP was designed as a utility support program that supports other programs As such it was designed to utilize the sentinel keys of the programs that it supports Currently XYZs_FTP will operate using sentinel keys supplied with Micro Manager Pro and 3D Tracker G 2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW XYZs_FTP is currently distributed as part of Micro Manager Pro The program will be installed in the Utils sub directory of Micro Manager Pro For example if during the installation of Micro Manager Pro you chose to have Micro Manager Pro installed into the D Program Files ASHTECH MicroMer directory then XYZs_FTP would be installed into the directory D Program Files ASHTECH MicroMer Utils 187 The automatic installation of Micro Manager Pro does not put XYZs_FTP into the Windows search path One can add XYZs_FTP to the Windows search path by right clicking on My Computer selecting the Properties menu item selecting the Environment tab selecting the Path system variable and then editing the Value field to include the directory in which XYZs_FTP is stored Additionally the automatic installation of Micro Manager Pro neither puts an icon onto the desktop nor into the Start
117. bout the receiver an example of this follows Receiver Information x Receiver Type Uz 12 Serial Humber AHHTIEH Hav Version UFB5 ars Channel Version Configuration WA Options BUEXMFT3JK Humber of Files Free Memory 5 Receiver Port al Port Speed 15200 Settings Save Mode Ring File Mode Clock Used internal External Clock Freq lr Internal Clock Steering Enabled The table that follows provides a description of each of the values in this window Field Description Receiver Describes the type of receiver currently connected to Micro Manager Type Serial Provides the receiver s serial number Number Nav Version The receiver s navigation firmware version number 86 Field Description Channel The receiver s channel firmware version number Version Configuration The receiver s configuration options consult the Receiver Operations Manual for details The uZ Family receivers do not currently report this parameter Options The current options supported by the receiver consult the Receiver Operations Manual for details Number of The number of data files stored in the receiver s memory Files Free Memory The percentage of memory remaining i e unused receiver memory Receiver Port The communications port of the receiver over which Micro Manager is currently communicating
118. capability that exploits programs supporting command line parameters or scripting 215 Before continuing however it is important to state that the Post Convert Command feature provides users with great flexibility and power With this flexibility and power comes the potential for users to incorrectly call programs external to TRUMP This is because TRUMP has NO knowledge of correct vs incorrect calls to external programs and cannot therefore provide any checks of correctness before the calls to these external programs are actually made In short only advanced knowledgeable users should exploit the Post Convert Command feature Presented in Section 3 1 5 3 of this document is an additional set of warnings regarding the Micro Manager Post Download command feature but these warnings also apply to the TRUMP Post Convert Command feature you are strongly encouraged to read these warnings Basically a Post Convert command is a call to an external program using a command line structure That is many programs can be run automatically through command line arguments For example to run the MS DOS version of PKZIP one normally types something like the following at the MS DOS prompt PKZIP MYZIPDAT UREMDA99 123 When PKZIP is called in this way all of the information it needs is provided in the command line call and PKZIP can then run without human interaction The basic problem is how can TRUMP call these programs and provide information
119. cause Micro Manager to display a pop up menu that allows one to change the case of the letters that will be sent when the Send button is pushed When the pop up menu item indicating upper case has been selected i e indicated by the check symbol next to the menu item Micro Manager will translate any lower case characters to upper case before sending the command To change the Command case handling simply select the pop up menu item Selecting the menu item in this way will toggle the case handling to its opposite setting The Data Sent area of the window displays the commands that you have sent to the receiver You can also click in this area and then start directly typing characters As each character is typed they are sent through the configured communication port see Section 3 1 1 The primary differences between this approach and the Command approach are 1 With the Command and Send approach the entire entered command is sent once the Send button is pressed and not until Using the Data Sent area of the window as each character is typed it is sent over the communications port 2 With the Command and Send approach commands are sent with a lt CR gt lt LF gt sequence at the end of each message Using the Data Sent area of the window you need to force the sending of special characters such as lt CR gt and lt LF gt by entering the proper control sequences For exam
120. ccsscccssssssscsscsssescssssesssesssseseseoes 81 4 1 4 1 Diagnostic Message Window qu ccessesssssessssssseesceceeeesesececececsenenenseseeeceeeseasavanasesececeees 82 4 1 4 2 Receiver Tracking Status Window 0 cceecesssssesstssstsseseeesecececeesenenensnsececeeeassravanaeaseees 82 4 1 4 3 Earth Centered Earth Fixed Position and Time Window ccssesssscsecseeeeeesees 83 4 1 4 4 Geodetic Position and Time Window ccccssssssessseseseeeeecececeesesenenseseeeceasensravasaeaseees 85 4 1 4 5 Receiver Information Window qu cseesesssssssssssesssesccceeseeecesececeesesenensnseseceeeeesranaraeaseees 86 4 1 4 6 RTCM Status Window uo ccccccccecseenensnsesesecesesesssssssescscececsesesesesecececsesenensnsateceesessenenees 89 4 1 4 6 1 RTCM Type 1 Display ccs cccinn ainsi sinacataseiinidauenniiddiisineciee 92 4 1 4 6 2 gt RTCM Type 2 Display czsesiecs cece scissenihtepcueetensesesy a verasecenipeedhtieacsancusehpessuseseevenes 93 4 1 4 6 3 RICM Type 3 Display s cccccie casa eieionniecie aid n i a aie denise 94 4 1 4 6 4 RTCM Type 6 Display neen insent nane e eE 95 4 14 65 RTCM Type 9 Display sccsccrnnoirusinceiienio anisi ea 96 4 1 4 6 6 RTCM Type 15 Display siy sccs csccsscscstsesesssesensacutscseesssevevavesdusdesdeccevbotbevecesuevenevenntnadecces 97 4 1 4 6 7 RTCM Type 16 Display cenn cesesesessesesececssssesssssesssesceeeesesesesecesecseseneneneaeeeeeeeeees 98 4 1 4 6 8 RTCM Type 18 Display cccesessssesesececssesesss
121. ce position set see Sections 4 1 4 3 and 4 1 4 4 respectively 131 4 1 5 4 5 Programming Sessions Using Micro Manager users can configure receiver logging sessions A session in this context is defined as a time period in which GPS data are collected This ability to define numerous sessions is referred to as the Session Programming capability These sessions delimit the times and provide the parameters governing the collection of GPS data For example the user can define a data collection session beginning at 1 00 AM every day collecting data for 1 hour collecting 1 second epoch data during that period and using an elevation mask of 5 degrees The user could then define another data collection session beginning at 10 00 AM every day collecting data for 4 hours collecting 20 second epoch data using an elevation mask of 10 degrees and storing data only when there are 4 or more satellites To access the receiver s session programming through Micro Manager simply select the Program Sessions pop up menu option of the Settings sub menu option of the Receiver main menu option You will be provided with a window similar to the following oe Programming enlre x sine Di f O gact Prr iei f F Seecion Parameters x Unter End Time TEE Oh Se e A a A The above window shows an example where the receiver s session programming feature has been disabled You enable the session programming feat
122. close to zero i e the receiver s clock will remain very closely aligned with the GPS time system When deselected the receiver s internal clock will not be steered and be permitted to drift with respect to the GPS time system In this mode the receiver s internal clock offset and pseudo range observations will experience 1 millisecond jumps These jumps occur when the receiver s internal clock offset has been computed to be approximately 1 ms offset from GPS time For further details on this subject please consult the appropriate receiver operations manual You are permitted to enable the clock steering whenever an external clock mode is used i e External or Automatic Switch However enabling the clock steering when using an external clock is not recommended and will elicit a warning from Micro Manager To check on the status of the receiver clock parameters particularly to determine if the receiver recognizes a configured external clock use the Receiver Information window see Section 4 1 4 5 For more detailed information on the internal and external clock usage as well as the internal clock steering mode please consult the appropriate receiver operations manual 4 1 5 4 2 Receiver Network Settings Micro Manager can be used to configure and start the networking facilities of the iCGRS receivers i e the internet capable GPS receivers which have a similar appearance to the uZ CGRS receivers bu
123. clude drive letter and pathname See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert downloaded receiver files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message 2 Depending upon the receiver configuration an Almanac File may not be output through the conversion process Micro Manager has no way to verify this when the command is created If no Almanac File is created during the conversion process the post download command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post download command The name of the RINEX Observation Data file created from the converted Ashtech data files includes full path See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert Ashtech formatted files to RINEX files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning e The name of the RINEX Observation Data file created from the converted Ashtech data files does not include drive letter and pathname See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert downloaded receiver files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit
124. coming and thus Micro Manager believes that there are errors in communication To avoid these problems simply close the receiver status windows whenever changing the PC s communication port settings 25 Upon pressing the OK button in this window and assuming Micro Manager is currently aware that it is directly connected i e not connected via modem to a GPS receiver Micro Manager will perform some additional processing To fully understand the discussion to follow some background information is required There were two somewhat opposing design goals in the early stages of the Micro Manager development effort 1 To allow users to utilize some minimal features of the program with other Thales Navigation i e non uZ Family GPS receivers and as a general terminal program and 2 To boost the user s productivity by performing some behind the scenes processing These two goals are somewhat conflicting because in order to reach the second goal one must be communicating with the receiver i e the communication rates of both the receiver s port and the computer s port must be the same In order to reach this second goal Micro Manager must determine the receiver type whenever possible Micro Manager achieves this by issuing receiver specific query commands over the communication port However this conflicts with the first goal particularly to the use of the program as a general terminal program Thus when you change the co
125. conds of the hour GPS time frame Ref Health The health flag being reported in the Type 18 message Seq The RTCM Sequence Number SQNU attached to the RTCM Type 18 message SV Each element SV column contains satellite number pertaining to that row Freq Each element of the Freq column contains the frequency L1 or L2 of the carrier phase observation for the satellite on that row Wlen Each element of the Wlen column contains the wavelength F Full H Half of the carrier phase observation for the satellite on that row 99 Field Description Code Each element of the Code column contains the codephase tracking loop CA C A P P Code of the carrier phase observation for the satellite on that row Qual Each element of the Qual column contains the quality indicator for the carrier phase observation for the satellite on that row According to the RTCM standard Version 2 2 the carrier phase quality indicator is the one sigma phase measurement error as indicated below Value Description 0 Phase Error lt 0 00391 Cycles 1 Phase Error lt 0 00696 Cycles 2 Phase Error lt 0 01239 Cycles 3 Phase Error lt 0 02208 Cycles 4 Phase Error lt 0 03933 Cycles 5 Phase Error lt 0 07006 Cycles 6 Phase Error lt 0 12480 Cycles 7 Phase Error gt 0 12480 Cycles Loss Each element of the Loss column contains the cumulative loss of continuity indicator for the carrier phase obse
126. consult your receiver manual for details on that command and the receiver parameters affected by the receiver parameters save mode 4 1 5 4 8 RTCM Configuration Through the RTCM Configuration window you can configure the RTCM settings employed by your receiver The GPS Receiver can be configured as an RTCM Base station an RTCM Remote station or it can be configured as neither Base nor Remote i e No RTCM mode The sample windows that follow show the appearance of the window in each of these modes RTCM Configuration E Autodiierentialmode E E Use Sequence HuUmbDeErsS 139 RTCM Configuration Reference Position Message RTCH Configuration pioMMode for Staion Pp Ret Healthy o Speed Mas Messages Notice in the examples provided above that depending upon the mode selected several of the edit fields are disabled denoted by the graying of the entry field and its label These disabled fields are not applicable under the given mode Also of note in the example window shown for the disabled RTCM mode is that the edit field for the mode itself is disabled This occurs when the Output Port i e the port that the receiver will attempt to communicate RTCM data is set to the same receiver port that Micro Manager using to communicate with the receiver In other words Micro Manager will not permit you to configure RTCM operations on the s
127. contain valid firmware files This is confirmed by the displayed status i e Firmware files Validated and Ready and by the now enabled Start Upload and Config Protocol buttons When the window has this appearance 121 Micro Manager is indicating that it has validated the firmware files in the selected directory and is ready to begin the firmware uploading process At this point you could choose to alter the parameters that govern the transfer of the firmware files to the receiver By pressing the Config Protocol button you will be presented with the following window ZModem Protocol Congifuration Window Download i The parameters of this window are described in Section 3 1 6 4 To begin uploading firmware press the Start Upload Button on the Firmware Upload window Once the upload starts you will be given an upload status window similar to the following ZModem Firmware Upload es E E E Uploading MZCODE BIN You may have noticed that the window used for firmware uploads looks very similar to the window used for receiver file downloads i e to the PC This is true In fact you can refer to Section 4 1 5 1 1 for a complete description of the parameters displayed in this window Just keep in mind when reading those descriptions that they are now describing the transfer of files to the receiver As said earlier firmware uploads are protected by a multi tiere
128. ction E 3 1 2 5 E 3 1 2 1 Specifying the Source Meteorological Data File To select the source meteorological data file simply type its name in the first prompt field provided or use the Browse button next to that field By pressing the Browse button you will be provided with a file selection window similar to that available in other Windows programs The file type you will be looking for will normally have either a NMA extent or will have the form D for Ashtech D Files The NMA files are Ashtech NMEA files created by GBSS This is important because if you are using GBSS you must instruct GBSS to store the NMEA file via its Configuration File Outputs menu options Furthermore GBSS must be configured to store the XDR and GXP NMEA messages This is because the XDR message will contain the meteorological sensor data and the GXP message will contain the time tag associated with the XDR message Please note that XYZAshRx assumes that the Meteorological data is sampled near the time stated in the GXP message That said it should be clear that the accuracy of the time tag as it relates to the XDR message is the rate at which the GXP messages are being output On the other hand the D Files created by Micro Manager contain unambiguous time stamps 169 E 3 1 2 2 Start Day of the Meteorological Data File Two key facts must be considered when converting the NMEA capture file created by GBSS 1 the NMEA GXP
129. ctual production work in that environment takes place 226
130. cutes 3 1 6 Miscellaneous Configuration Items The Miscellaneous Configuration Options window allows you to configure the following options 1 2 3 4 5 Sounds played to indicate warning and alert conditions How diagnostic messages are displayed and printed to the Log File The directory in which to store output files Parameters describing maximum errors during a file download operation and Other miscellaneous configuration items The Miscellaneous Configuration Options window is divided into tabbed sections each of which relates to the topics described above 68 3 1 6 1 Configuring Alert Sounds z N r ix ert Beare Digros tags apars Paois Ainoedaneean T Pay nd Sie on Warning d eiect Obs Peon Sete OTe ee Sa Piy ea ie al lke ai iian Micro Manager is capable of playing audio WAV files when an alert or warning condition arises IT IS IMPORTANT TO NOTE THAT Micro Manager DOES NOT CHECK TO ENSURE THAT A YOU HAVE A SOUND CARD AND B THAT YOUR SOUND CARD IS CAPABLE OF PLAYING WAV FILES If your computer does not have a sound card it is suggested that you not attempt to play any sounds i e that you leave the Play sound file on Warning and Play sound file on Alert checkboxes unchecked To play a sound file on the Warning condition ensure that the Play sound file on Warning checkbox is checked and you use the associated Select File to select the desired WAV file Upon making you
131. d Receiving Describes the target file name i e the local computer disk file name The output directory is not displayed but all downloaded files are output to the directory specified under Section 3 1 6 3 File Bytes Transferred Displays the ratio of total bytes required by the file over the total number of bytes of the file transferred thus far Sometimes the word Extended will appear in this field When this occurs Micro Manager is currently downloading the Active receiver file i e the file that the receiver is currently storing data to and has detected that the file size exceeds that reported by the receiver when the transfer started This is NOT an erroneous condition Rather Micro Manager is simply indicating that it will download more bytes for this file than it originally indicated File Number Displays the file number in an X of Y format where Y is the total number of files selected for download and X is the number of the current file being downloaded 115 Field Description Transfer Corrections Whenever the file transfer process detects any error and is able to recover from that error the Transfer Corrections value will increment by one This number is provided as a communication quality measure to you the user Normally this number will stay very small say less than 10 for a 4 Mb file Should you see larger values for this number you should consider d
132. d are incremented at one per record Record numbers are written such that the full field width contains digits i e Zero padded to the left when appropriate Name_of_Entry 70 This field is simply a text string you wish to use to identify the telephone directory entry This field will not be passed to the modem during dialing operations nor will it be used for any other configuration purposes Telephone_Number 70 This field allows you to specify the telephone number of the remote system to be dialed Please note that this is a modem string and is subjected to the same special character rules described in Section 3 1 2 BAUD Contains the speed of the link between the PC and the modem Acceptable values are 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 Parity Contains the parity of the link between the PC and the modem These values are coded as follows Coded Value Description 0 No Parity 1 Odd Parity 2 Even Parity 3 Marked Parity Data_bits Contains the data bits used in the link between the PC and the modem These values are coded as follows Coded Value Description 7 7 Data Bits 8 8 Data Bits Stop_bits Contains the stop bits used in the link between the PC and the modem These values are coded as follows Coded Value Description 0 1 Stop Bit 1 1 5 Stop Bits 2 2 Stop Bits 158 Appendix E Utility Program XY ZAshRx E 1 Introducti
133. d i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message The name of the raw receiver U File just processed includes full drive name path of where the file was moved after being processed The name of the raw receiver U File just processed does not include drive letter and pathname The name of the B File converted from the receiver U File includes full path The name of the B File converted from the receiver U File does not include drive letter and pathname 218 Description The name of the C File converted from the receiver U File includes full path Notes 1 Depending upon the receiver configuration a C File may not be output through the conversion process TRUMP has no way to verify this when the command is created If no C File is created during the conversion process the post convert command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post convert command The name of the C File converted from the receiver U File does not include drive letter and pathname Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert receiver U Files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message Depending upon the receiver configuration a C File may not be output through the conversion process TRUMP has no way to verify this when the command is created If no C File is creat
134. d the deletion operation will not occur when there are any unrecovered errors resulting from the download operation s yl dI hl ml y2 d2 h2 m2 For automatic download of files having closure times between two specific times in the GPS time system y the year 4 digits d day of year h hour optional m minute optional x yl d1 h1 m1 y2 d2 h2 m2 149 For automatic deletion of selected files bounded by two specific closure times in the GPS time system Note if this parameter is used with any automatic download command then the deletion will only occur if all files are successfully downloaded y the year 4 digits d day of year h hour optional m minute optional u uploadname For automatic upload of a script file to the receiver where uploadname is the name of the script file including drive and path to be uploaded The format of script files is provided in Appendix C Note this parameter should not be used with any other download and delete command line parameters but it can be used with the c parameter Micro Manager performs no checks to validate compliance with these restrictions Example 1 MicroMgr exe c 5 g 6 0 d 12 0 In this example Micro Manager has been instructed to establish a remote modem connection using telephone list entry number 5 It then obtains files that have been closed less than 6 hours prior to the current receiver time Upon successful download
135. d by Micro Manager to report RTCM Type 16 messages The display shows the last RTCM Type 16 message sent Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 6 Type 9 Type 15 Type 16 Type 18 Type 19 Type 20 Type 21 Ty gt Time Of Message f8 08 48 00 age 00 00 03 37 Station ID jz Z Count fia Ref Health fo Seq p Type 16 Message Body This is atest message from Base Station The following table contains a description of each parameter displayed in the RTCM Type 16 message display Field Description Time Of The GPS time expressed as time of GPS day at which the Type 16 Message message was sent for Base station or received for Rover stations If the message is over a second old then the time will also contain an age display If such a message has not been sent or received then this field will contain None Received Station ID The RTCM Base Station ID contained in the Type 16 message Z Count The RTCM message Z Count ZCNT of the Type 16 message The RTCM Z Count is the time tag of the message and is displayed as seconds of the hour GPS time frame Ref Health The health flag being reported in the Type 16 message Seq The RTCM Sequence Number SQNU attached to the RTCM Type 16 message 98 Field Description Type 16 The text of the special message in the Type 16 message Message Body 4 1 4 6 8 RTCM Type 18 Display RTCM Type 18 messages commu
136. d convention supplied port numbers are used for different networking services e g TELNET SMTP and FTP Port 21 is used by nearly all systems for FTP services We provide an entry for the port number to allow FTP connections with servers that do not support the recognized convention Again normally Port 21 is used for FTP transfers User ID This is the User ID or login name that is created by the System Administrator of the host site That is even though a host site exists and is accessible through the network or internet you cannot gain access to the FTP services until that host system allows you to log in Even though an account has been set up for you giving you a user name and password you may not be able to access all of the FTP features such as creating directories deleting directories uploading files and or downloading files unless your account has been created with the appropriate access privileges You must check with the host system administrator for account information and he she must grant the access privileges Password See User ID described above To protect your password the prompt field will always contain asterisk characters for each letter of the password Additionally the configuration information for each site is stored in a file The passwords however are encrypted in that file Backspace and correction are permitted TimeOut This field specifies the maximum number of seconds to wait between the
137. d in the Type 1 message 4 1 4 6 2 RTCM Type 2 Display RTCM Type 2 messages communicate Delta Differential GPS Corrections The screen capture that follows shows an example display generated by Micro Manager to report RTCM Type 2 messages The display shows the last RTCM Type 2 message sent Type1 Type2 tre 3 Type 6 Type 9 Type 15 Type 16 Type 18 Type 19 Type 20 Type 21 Ty gt Time Of Message f 7 09 15 00 age 00 00 20 32 Station ID pres Z Count sere Ref Health fe Seq g SVPRH s 2 45 29 Delta PRC 0 140 0 140 0 240 0 000 Delta RRC 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 l l IODE 160 16 83 30 UDRE 4 e 41 o The following table contains a description of each parameter displayed in the RTCM Type 2 message display Field Description Time Of The GPS time expressed as time of GPS day at which the Type 2 Message message was sent for Base station or received for Rover stations If the message is over a second old then the time will also contain an age display If such a message has not been sent or received then this field will contain None Received Station ID_ The RTCM Base Station ID contained in the Type 2 message Z Count The RTCM message Z Count ZCNT of the Type 2 message The RTCM Z Count is the time tag of the message and is displayed as seconds of the hour GPS time frame Ref Health The health flag be
138. d mechanism Should the uploading process fail or be canceled at any stage the uploaded firmware will not be used by the receiver i e it would continue to use the firmware resident before the firmware upload process was started This is important because at this point in the upload process the firmware file being uploaded is being written safely to a staging area Should this upload be interrupted for any reason and assuming you have selected the Automatic recovery mode enabled on firmware uploads option you can later continue the firmware upload where you left off Once the firmware is fully uploaded Micro Manager will ask you to confirm the replacement of the existing firmware with the newly uploaded firmware file Confirm Firmware Replacement Firmware upload has completed Do you wish to ask the receiver to replace its firmware with the uploaded file Please note that this may result in the loss or corruption of data files currently stored in the receiver s file memory Do you want to continue J Notice that the Firmware Replacement prompt window warns of the possibility of lost or corrupted data files For this reason you should download all important files from the receiver memory prior to attempting a firmware change This is because the new firmware may invoke a new file storage format and it may not recognize the old storage format Such a change should happen very rarely but we encourage you to NEVER trust the data file
139. d post download command Upon pressing this button you will be presented with a file selection window in which you will enter and or browse for the name of the file containing post download commands to be imported Upon pressing this button you will be presented with a file selection window in which you will enter and or browse for the name of the file in which to write the exported post download commands Cancels all changes to the post download commands The order of the commands can be changed through this window by selecting with the mouse the command to be moved and then dragging that command to the desired location within the list of commands Micro Manager supports up to 100 post download commands The wait flag indicates whether or not the command directly following the current command will be launched immediately after launching the current command or only after the current command has completely finished its execution That is the command wait feature is used to enforce a dependency of one command upon another in terms of when they are launched The wait flag is changed through the Post Download Command Line Editor window see Section 3 1 5 2 which is launched by selecting the desired command and pressing the Edit Button 59 Whenever Micro Manager detects any warnings associated with a particular command line the column labeled Warn for the command contains the value Yes When Micro Manager detect
140. d when the system administrator creates updates your account XYZs_FTP can store configuration information for several different FTP hosts It can even store multiple configurations say for different accounts for the same host The uniqueness 193 is identified by a descriptive host name that you provide Under the area of this window labeled as Host Site Selection there is a drop down list of all the independent configurations To adda new host simply press the Add Host button Upon doing so you will be provided with a window through which you can provide a descriptive name of the host You then create this descriptive host To rename a host 1 e to alter the descriptive name select the host via the drop down list box and then press Rename Site Upon doing so you will be provided a prompt window through which you can change the name of the host To delete a host configuration simply select the host to be deleted via the drop down list box and press Delete Site The configuration of the currently selected host site is contained in the area of the window that is labeled FTP Host Site Configuration The table that follows describes each of the elements this window area Host Enter the URL or IP address of the FTP host Address FTP Port TCP IP connections consist of an address and a port number One can treat each port number as a different virtual connection to the host site By an industry recognize
141. data to the receiver To accommodate all of these needs the upload is sent through an interpreter imbedded in Micro Manager This interpreter sends all ASCII text until it meets with a special escape character Immediately after these escape characters will be other characters describing the special characters to be sent or which describe other processing that must take place Once the escape processing is handled Micro Manager will resume sending the ASCII data in the file The special escape character is V If this character is followed by a character then the escape sequence is considered to be delay processing A delay sequence is of the form time where time is the number milliseconds the interpreter should delay before continuing with the upload If the character following the escape character is 0 i e the zero character then Micro Manager will translate the octal escape sequence into a binary character For example 015 is the octal representation of the carriage return character To send a V character the character immediately following the V must be a Finally the carriage returns or any line feed characters that are normally part of an ASCII file are not sent as part of the uploaded data to send these characters you must use the octal representation of the characters The following provides an example upload file 155 SPASHS RCI 5 0 015 012 100 SPASHQ RID 015 012 100 SPASHQ RAW
142. de 774012062121 pmo pa Jasas Ellipsoid Height 23 349 N ECEF X ECEF Y ECEF Z fi 091087 0900 aser 725 7900 f3943905 5500 The following table contains a description of each parameter displayed in the RTCM Type 3 message display Field Description Time Of The GPS time expressed as time of GPS day at which the Type 3 Message message was sent for Base station or received for Rover stations If the message is over a second old then the time will also contain an age display If such a message has not been sent or received then this field will contain None Received Station ID The RTCM Base Station ID contained in the Type 3 message Z Count The RTCM message Z Count ZCNT of the Type 3 message The RTCM Z Count is the time tag of the message and is displayed as seconds of the hour GPS time frame Ref Health The health flag being reported in the Type 3 message 94 Field Description Seq The RTCM Sequence Number SQNU attached to the RTCM Type 3 message and Ellipsoid Height North Latitude The geodetic position WGS 84 of the reference RTCM receiver East Longitude identified by the Station ID field of the Type 3 message West Longitude ECEF X ECEF Y and ECEF Z The Earth Centered Earth Fixed coordinates WGS 84 of the reference RTCM receiver identified by the Station ID field of the Type 3 message 4 1 4 6 4 RTCM
143. distributed as part of Micro Manager The program will be installed in the same directory as that of MicroMgr exe For example if during the installation of Micro Manager you chose to install Micro Manager into the D Program Files ASHTECH MicroMer directory then XYZAshRx would be installed into the same directory The automatic installation of Micro Manager does not put XYZAshRx into the Windows search path One can add XYZAshRx to the Windows search path by right clicking on My Computer selecting the Properties menu item selecting the Environment tab selecting the Path system variable and then editing the Value field to include the directory in which XYZAshRx is stored Additionally the automatic installation of Micro Manager puts an icon neither onto the desk top nor in the Start Menu bar To create a program icon on the desktop simply find the program file XYZAshRx EXE using My Computer right click and drag the icon to the desktop and select Create Shortcut Here For details on how to add a program to the Start Menu consult Windows Help searching on Start Menu and selecting the topic dealing with adding menu items to the Start Menu Finally XYZAshRx is protected by a software sentinel key the same key as is used by Micro Manager The software sentinel key is installed by attaching the end of the sentinel key labeled AX8COMPUTER to a parallel printer port of your computer Tight
144. dollar character That is the dollar character is normally used to mark the start and end points of a mnemonic However the mnemonic means that the final translated command line command will contain an actual dollar character Please note that the translation of mnemonics is based on information found in converted U files This is why mnemonics should not to be used in the U File Search Directory If one does insert mnemonic codes into the U File Search Directory entry these will not be translated and TRUMP will expect that the directory name contains these exact characters H 3 1 3 Post Convert Commands Window The Post Convert Commands Window is displayed in response to the Post Convert Commands selection from the program s Configuration menu The following provides an example of the Post Convert Commands Window 214 Ed FPost Conyert Dorn A a TATAP ary eein Hinos gaaminn HEEE Y TRUMP arg iaeiae Bhakti PETET r THUMM arg teeteme GPS eek Start CGPWSH s STRAP arg teeteme Senne of GPS Week Sari OSS P TATAP arg iesene GPS Week Erd HOPWEE he TRUMP arg tations Scone of GPS Week End POPSER a TAa g iesen Cha Vaii Wani 6455 cP AMM ar teaiin Ear Yea Ee ES Te TRUMP arg nalna 2 Chat Yaar Slat pyys i Ee TRUMP ary tasta Char Yaar Hit ed Te 3 ve a3 Yes s ves e ves Je ves EB aes 3 tes EHM ja mj Yes t Yee n tee Yes tr THUMP arg tesi
145. ds of CRE Waak of date start 1GPWEy OFS Week of dace eed x Wianings This window allows you to locate directories in which TRUMP will search for new U Files Note All sub directories of U File search directory will also be searched In addition you can specify the target output directories of the Raw Ashtech BES and RINEX files Finally you can specify the directory into which a U File will be moved once it has been processed Note It is strongly recommended that you do not make this directory a sub directory of any directory specified as a new U Files search directory Doing so will result in the same U Files being processed each time the directories are searched Often a user will want to specify file and date time specific information in directory names Trump provides this information using mnemonics For example if a user wants all outputted BES files for a given GPS week to be placed in a directory that has a name containing that week the user could specify a folder name using a mnemonic for GPS weeks Acceptable folder name mnemonics and a more detail explanation mnemonics are discussed in Section H 3 1 2 1 Please note that mnemonics cannot be used in the U File Search Directory 211 H 3 1 2 1 Directory Mnemonics TRUMP allows you to specify file and date time specific information in directory names Output directories once configured will be created AFTER the completion of the conversion process Converted files are
146. e checkbox labeled Write verbose diagnostic messages to log file when unchecked keeps the diagnostic messages to their minimum Log Files contain the diagnostic messages generated by TRUMP for an entire GPS day The format of the Log File name is described in Appendix A 2 The Display verbose diagnostic messages checkbox controls the level of diagnostic messages written to the Diagnostic Messages window Some users may not be interested in seeing all of the diagnostic messages Leaving this checkbox unchecked keeps the diagnostic messages to a minimum i e displaying only critical messages The system resources e g CPU time of some older computers may be unnecessarily taxed when updates occur in the Diagnostic Messages Display window Leaving this checkbox unchecked will help to free up some of these resources 223 Miscellaneous Configuration Opti ajx dlen Sounds Diegnosic Megs Mucellareous FF Display the Background Batra Aber beey Beet wreserry Serer hee Tempa There are three parameters in this section The first parameter Display the Background Bitmap when checked displays the program s background bitmap When unchecked the background bitmap will not be displayed Itis important to note that changes made to this parameter will only have an effect once you restart the program i e you will need to terminate TRUMP and then restart it for the change to take effect The second Pa
147. e directory entry This field will not be passed to the modem during dialing operations nor will it be used for any other configuration purposes The Telephone Number Dialing String allows you to specify the telephone number of the remote system to be dialed Please note that this is a modem string which is subjected to the same special character rules described in Section 3 1 2 The last four parameters i e BAUD Parity Data Bits and Stop Bits of the window describe the communication link between the PC and the modem when establishing a connection to the remote system identified by this entry Specifics on the values of these parameters are the 39 same as is described in Sections 3 1 1 2 through 3 1 1 6 The comm port used to establish the connection is that which you chose in the Communication Port Configuration window see Section 3 1 1 3 1 3 3 Copying an Existing Telephone Directory Entry To copy an existing telephone directory list entry simply select the desired entry and press the Copy Button Upon doing so the same dialog window presented in Section 3 1 3 2 will be displayed This time however Micro Manager will have created a new entry and copied the values from the selected entry 3 1 3 4 Creating a New Telephone Directory Entry To create a new telephone directory list entry simply press the New Button Upon doing so the same dialog window presented in Section 3 1 3 2 will be displayed The stri
148. e data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file The 2 digit minute of the GPS hour of the start of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file The 2 digit minute of the GPS hour of the end of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file The 2 digit minute truncated to the quarter hour of the GPS hour of the start of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file The 2 digit minute truncated to the quarter hour of the GPS hour of the end of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file The 2 digit second of the GPS minute of the start of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file The 2 digit second of the GPS minute of the end of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file The full output path configured for Micro Manager See section 3 1 6 3 includes drive and path The full output path configured for Micro Manager See section 3 1 6 3 includes path but not drive letter and no colon
149. e file for site ASHT taken in session D of day 5 of 1999 Using this convention the 151 receiver generates the names of the files that Micro Manager will use when creating disk resident U Files that are downloaded from the receiver See Section 4 1 5 1 NOTE When the uZ CGRS receiver stores more than 24 files in a single day the naming convention is slightly altered In this case the first digit of the yy portion of the file name becomes an incrementor and starts at A and can roll to C For example UASHTAA9 005 is a valid file name and would normally be the 25 file stored on that day Likewise UASHTDC9 005 is also a valid file name for the same day The conversion programs UpackU12 exe and XYZAshRx exe will accept input files with these names and produce like names However when the 10 3 RINEX file naming mode has been selected see Section 3 1 4 XYZAshRx exe will produce the 10 3 RINEX names For complete details on the U File names generated by the uZ CGRS please consult the appropriate receiver manual A 2 LOG File Naming Approach The Micro Manager Log File names are of the following form yyddd LOG where yy represents the last two digits of the year and ddd represents the day of the year For example a file named 97233 LOG is a Micro Manager Log File for day 233 of 1997 In the year 2000 the file name would begin with 00 Unlike the R File names these file names are based upon the CPU clock
150. e position when configuring an RTCM Base station the receiver will reject many of the other RTCM configuration parameters Under such a condition Micro Manager will give an error message indicating that the configuration values just sent to the receiver do match those reported by the receiver in its confirmation message Output Port Identifies the receiver port over which RTCM messages are communicated When the receiver port identified is the same as that used by Micro Manager to communicate with the receiver then all other edit fields of this window will be disabled i e you will first need to change and Send the RTCM port assignment before configuring the RTCM mode of the receiver Speed Sets the number of bits per second issuing from the assigned RTCM serial port The selectable range is from 25 to 1500 Bits per second There is also a Burst mode selection In the burst mode the receiver will output the data over the selected communication port at a rate no greater than the BAUD rate of that port see Section 4 1 5 4 3 This field will only be enabled when the receiver is running under the Base RTCM mode EOT Identifies the End Of Transmission sequence attached to the end of the RTCM messages This field will only be enabled when the receiver is running under the Base RTCM mode 141 Parameter Description Station ID When in the Base Station mode the receiver will use thi
151. e pressure sensor When unchecked you are given an opportunity to enter the coordinates of the sensor the Edit Position button can be used to enter the coordinates in other coordinate representations The Model and Type fields are textual while the Accuracy is numeric The accuracy of the sensor will be entered in units reported by that sensor e g pressure accuracy is entered in mbar temperature accuracy is entered in unit of Celsius and the humidity accuracy is entered in percentage of humidity For details on these fields please consult the appropriate RINEX standard documentation see Appendix E for a reference 3 1 5 Editing Post Download Commands Micro Manager allows you to specify programs to be called at the completion of a download and conversion process That is in Section 4 1 5 1 we describe the process of downloading receiver files and options related to their conversion from the receiver format to Ashtech format file and RINEX files Post Download commands once configured will be executed AFTER the completion of the download and conversion process To reduce redundancy in the documentation that follows we will refer to the point at which post download commands execute as after the download completes In this we really mean that these commands are executed after the download and file conversions complete Through this feature you can have Micro Manager pass information created from within Micro Man
152. e receiver to ensure that the data were transmitted properly Any errors will be reported to you through error message windows Finally there is a special session programming pop up menu that you can use to perform a standard set of configuration options This pop up menu shown below is accessed by right clicking once when the mouse cursor is placed in a field of any session Delete Session Delete All Seeasapns Auto Config 15 Min Sessions Auto Config 30 Min Sessions Auto Config Hr Sessions Auto Config 2 Hr Sessions Auto Config 4 Hr Sessions Auto Config Hr Sessions Auto Config 8 Hr Sessions o Config 12 Hr Sessoms Auto Config 24 Hr Session Selecting the Delete Session will cause the session that was being edited when the right click operation took place to be deleted The Delete All Sessions option deletes all sessions which is the same as setting the Sess Progr Mode to Disabled The remaining items of the pop up window allow you to auto configure the receiver for several session configurations often used For example the Auto Config 1 Hr Sessions will cause Micro Manager to create twenty four 1 hour sessions while the Auto Config 6 Hr Sessions will cause Micro Manager to create four 6 hour sessions These auto configurations like any other configuration set through the Session Programming Window will not be sent to the receiver until you press the Send button NOTES 1 Note
153. e restart of Micro Manager The commands however will be started but with new mnemonic substitutions at the completion of the subsequent download and convert operation i e basically the set of commands that were scheduled to execute but have not executed at the time of the system failure are lost It is recommended that you not use post download commands with embedded spaces in the paths For examples many programs are automatically installed in the Program Files directory While Micro Manager has been tested with and does operate properly with paths containing spaces this author has seen the Windows command processor become confused with paths containing spaces For this reason it is recommended that you not use paths with embedded spaces i e copy or move programs to paths that do not contain spaces Additionally you can assist the command interpreter by placing quotes around the executable program name or batch file name including path in the command line text You should not place quotes around the working directory of the post download command For example C Program Files Ashtech MicroMger Utls AshFTPMD exe contains a space To assist the interpreter enclose the entire program path in quotes e g C Program Files Ashtech MicroMegr Utls AshFTPMD exe MS DOS Batch files can be called from Micro Manager as well When batch files are called from within Micro Manager Windows creates a command interpreter window and
154. e target directories describe above it is recommended that permission be granted to allow TRUMP to create folders and sub folders and these folders TRUMP should be able to create files overwrite files and destroy files in these folders When TRUMP is connected to directories and files managed by an FTP server it is recommended that these connections be through mapped drives As a contrary example adding an FTP server to My Network Places of Windows can lead to problems That is the directories of the FTP server appear as if they are mapped to a sub folder of your system the underlying link created by Windows can add some restrictions For example when a file is accessed on this Network Place Windows may request a user acknowledgement If TRUMP is operating unmanned which is a primary feature then it will be suspended until one acknowledges that Windows prompt Other such behavior has been noted with such Windows Network Places For this reason it is recommended that FTP servers be mounted as mapped drives In summary networks add a level of complexity to the installation task of TRUMP Your System Network Administrator should know and understand how to configure the system network and create the appropriate accounts permissions TRUMP cannot supercede configurations in place for your network As with the deployment of any system it is important that one fully test TRUMP in the operational environment before a
155. eave the Use B File Averaged Position unchecked and enters a fixed antenna position most users will use Micro Manager with fixed reference stations When this checkbox is unchecked one can enter the Earth Centered Earth Fixed X Y and Z coordinates directly into the fields provided in the window One can also push the Edit Position button and be given an opportunity to provide the fixed coordinates in other coordinate representations e g Latitude Longitude and Height through a pop up window However by checking the checkbox one can have an averaged B File position placed into the RINEX site position header record for details on averaged B File position see Appendix E Through the Positional Data tab one can also enter antenna height and antenna positional offset information All units of the antenna offsets are meters 3 1 4 4 2 RINEX Observation File Header Data When the Header Data tab of the Observations tab of the RINEX Configuration window is pressed the window will have an appearance similar to the following 45 In this area one enters header data that is specific to RINEX Observation files The fields of this tabbed section are defined and described in the RINEX standard documentation a reference to which can be found in Appendix E 3 1 4 4 3 RINEX Observation File Options When the Options tab of the Observations tab of the RINEX Configuration window
156. ecified the converter will output the Observation data to the file OBS DAT The N parameter specifies that the Navigation RINEX data will be output to the file NAV DAT The output files will be placed in the same directory as that of the B File which is the current working directory in this case The T parameter allows you to specify the target path of the output RINEX files Some examples are listed below Example 5 XYZAshRx I BN102A97 323 EN102A97 323 SN102A97 323 T D RINEX OUT The converter uses the files BN102A97 323 EN102A97 323 and SN102A97 323 from the current working directory as the input B E and S Files respectively Because no O or N parameters were specified XYZAshRx will automatically name the RINEX observation and navigation output files but will place these files in the directory D RINEX OUT 173 Example 6 XYZAshRx I BN102A97 323 EN102A97 323 O OBS DAT N NAV DAT T E RINEX OUT The converter uses the files BN102A97 323 and EN102A97 323 from the current working directory as the input B and E Files respectively Because no S FILE was specified the converter will use the site related data stored in the program s configuration file for site related data Because the O parameter was specified the converter will output the Observation data to the file OBS DAT The N parameter specifies that the Navigation RINEX data will be output to the file NAV DAT The outpu
157. ecked and the Send button is pressed Micro Manager will instruct the receiver to start its networking facilities with the configured parameters Please note that included with Micro Manager is a utility program named TRUMP TRUMP was primarily designed to be used in conjunction with iCGRS receivers The iCGRS receivers have been designed to allow one to push via FTP receiver U Files to FTP sites TRUMP which normally resides on these FTP sites is used to detect the arrival of U Files at an FTP site and convert these files into it their constituent processing files e g Ashtech B E and S Files as well as RINEX data files That is TRUMP was designed to be a resident program on the target system network of U Files pushed to an FTP site by an iCGRS receiver When new U files arrive on that system network TRUMP automatically will perform the conversions specified by the operator For complete details on TRUMP please see Appendix H 4 1 5 4 3 Receiver Port Settings The following is an example Receiver Communication Port Settings Window Comm Port Parameters Port a FETT ME Active Portc 38490 PortB s600 PortD o600 f M Receiver Modem Configuration Modem Type jus Robotics Sportster x Port fc x Status jou Baud 3s400 Initialization String fatso 1 12 258H1X4E0M0 amp D0 Contig String arar Data Escape e Command Estape ATO Have receiver initialize the modem P sena x
158. ecreasing the communication speed see Sections 3 1 1 2 and 4 1 5 4 3 because the likely cause is a noisy data link which is normally improved by decreasing the data communication rate Raw Byte Count and Raw Byte Rate These fields provide information about the raw data communicated between the receiver and Micro Manager That is the protocol used for the file transfer requires some overhead bytes These numbers include these overhead bytes as well as actual file data byte i e they deal with all data bytes communicated The Raw Byte Count is the actual count of the bytes required thus far to transmit the file The Data Byte Rate provides an indication of the effective throughput in bytes per second of the transfer including protocol overhead bytes These numbers are provided only as status information that lets you know that Micro Manager and the GPS receiver are communicating data Data Byte Count and Data Byte Rate These fields provide information about the data bytes of the file being transferred between the receiver and Micro Manager That is the protocol used for the file transfer requires some overhead bytes These numbers provide counts of actual file bytes transmitted thus far and do not include the overhead bytes of the protocol used The Data Byte Count is the actual count of the file bytes transferred thus far including any re transmits that the protocol has requested The Data Byte R
159. ed The Protocol Start Up Timeout parameter is important for two primary reasons 1 Once Micro Manager enters the file transfer mode all other functions of the program are disabled with the exception of the Exit program function until after the transfer completes or is terminated and 2 During unattended operations such as downloading using the command line approach Micro Manager could theoretically never terminate once a file transfer operation has been started Again you should never need to alter this parameter but you are given control in case some condition unforeseen to the developer of this program arises that may cause you to need to alter this parameter The Z Modem file transfer protocol breaks the object to be transferred up into blocks or packets The size of these packets is established by the Transfer Block Size parameter Each packet of data is sent individually These packets contain overhead information Among this information is a CRC like a checksum for validating the integrity of the individual block The recipient of these packets first validates the packets using the supplied CRC then strips the packet of the overhead information and then assembles them into a contiguous file Unlike older generation transfer protocols the Z Modem protocol uses a stream data until interrupted philosophy That is the sender will send out packets continuously and in order until the recipient detects
160. ed BAUD 2 Advanced communication options labeled Advanced Caren Por eats fem he fathered a When making configuration changes through this window or the window reached by pressing the Advanced button keep in mind that you are configuring the communication port of the local PC not the parameters of the device attached to that port However your configuration settings will depend on the device i e either a modem or a GPS receiver attached to the communication port Upon accepting the changes to this window by pressing the OK button Micro Manager will immediately attempt to configure and open the communication port of the local PC Please note that when you accept the port settings if any of the receiver status windows are open see Sections 4 1 4 through 4 1 4 7 Micro Manager will immediately attempt to obtain that status data This is important because if a live GPS receiver is not connected to that serial port or that receiver s communication port is not operating at the same communication speed or the connection to the receiver is normally done through a modem then Micro Manager will begin generating error messages In other words when the receiver status windows are open Micro Manager expects the receiver to be connected and begins issuing commands to obtain the status data Because the receiver is not attached or is configured at a different communication speed no responses are forth
161. ed In this way TRUMP can be configured to process data files at the rate expected by the target system i e it is assumed that one or more iCGRS receivers will be periodically pushing U files into the directories to be searched by TRUMP The next main menu item is View Upon selecting this item you will be presented with the following drop down menu 207 The Diagnostic Messages window displays real time textual messages providing information regarding current activities of TRUMP This Window is presented in Section H 3 1 1 When you select the Configuration menu item from the main menu you will be presented with the following drop down menu Directories Post Convert Commands RINEX Site Header Table Miscellaneous Before any processing can begin the Directories menu item must be selected Through this window which will be detailed in Section H 3 1 2 one enters the input and output directories of the program For example through this window one will specify the directories in which TRUMP will search for U files and then specify the directories into which TRUMP will place processed output files TRUMP allows you to specify your own special processing programs to be called at the completion of a conversion process This is accomplished by selecting the Post Convert Commands menu item The Post Convert Window is presented in Section H 3 1 3 and Post Convert Commands are presented in Section H 3
162. ed during the conversion process the post convert command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post convert command The name of the D File converted from the receiver U File includes full path Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert receiver U Files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message Depending upon the receiver configuration a D File may not be output through the conversion process TRUMP has no way to verify this when the command is created If no D File is created during the conversion process the post convert command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post convert command The name of the D File converted from the receiver U File does not include drive letter and pathname Notes 1 Depending upon the receiver configuration a D File may not be output through the conversion process TRUMP has no way to verify this when the command is created If no D File is created during the conversion process the post convert command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post convert command The name of the E File converted from the receiver U File includes full path The name of the E File c
163. ee your Receiver s Operations Manual for details E File The name of the output broadcast navigation message file called an E File S File The name of the output site file called an S File Events The name of the output event file which contains the events recorded by your receiver see your Receiver s Operations Manual for details Almanac The output satellite almanac file 183 Field Description Photos The output photogrammetry photo file see your Receiver s Operations Manual for details To start the conversion process press the Convert button Please note that UpackU12 will create and open all of the output files specified through this window However if the conversion process yields no data for a given file that file will be removed from the system upon completion of the conversion process For example not all receiver image files contain events In these cases no data will be output to the Event file When this occurs UpackU12 will erase that file from the computer upon completion of the conversion process F 3 1 3 Image Conversion Progress Window Upon pressing the Convert button in the File Selection Window you will be presented with the Image Conversion Progress window This window simply reports the progress of the conversion progress Image Conversion Progress Cancel As the conversion progresses this window will be updated As we Stated earlier i
164. eees 34 3 1 2 8 Entering Editing the Miscellaneous Modem Configuration Items eee 36 5 3 1 3 Telephone List wisccscsscccctssatsecdssosestecsvsessicsesoosssesssoadeseoassesesosssoevonssecsessscvesestuascescsocsevessees 38 3 1 3 1 Dialing a Telephone Directory Entry cece ceeceeceseseseeeeseccsceceseeeeeeecseeeeseeeeeeseneeesatees 39 3 1 3 2 Editing a Telephone Directory Entry 00 0 0 cececeecceccececeseeeeseecseeceseeeeeeecaeeceseeeeeeeeateeeatees 39 3 1 3 3 Copying an Existing Telephone Directory Entry 0 00 0 ccceceseeeeeeeseseeeeceeeeeeeeseneeeeees 40 3 1 3 4 Creating a New Telephone Directory Entry ccececeecesescsceeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeenteeeaeees 40 3 1 3 5 Deleting a Telephone Directory Entry ceccceesceseseseeseseseeeseseeeeeceeneeeeseeeeeeseeeeetees 40 3 1 3 6 Importing a Telephone Directory List 0 ce ceeccccsseseseeeeseceseeeeseseeeeecseeeeseeeeseeeseeeeaeees 40 3 1 3 7 Exporting the Current Telephone Directory List 0 0 cccceceeseeseeeeeeeeeseceseeeeeeseeeeeees 40 3 1 4 Configuring RINEX Site Header Tables sccsssccssccsccsscscsssccsseccssscsscssscssseseees 41 3 1 4 1 File Name Modes of RINEX Configuration Window ccccsescseseeeeseseeeseeeeeeeeeees 41 3 1 4 2 Site Tab of RINEX Configuration Window s seessesssesesseseesessrerrssesresrreerrsresresrsesreseess 43 3 1 4 3 Common Header Tab of RINEX Configuration Window seeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 44 3 1 4 4 Observations Tab
165. efore an existing connection is terminated The inactivity counter is disabled during file 37 s downloads Otherwise the user must make changes to the program or move the mouse to reset the inactivity counter to avoid automatic log off Please note that a value of 1 for this parameter disables the termination due to inactivity 3 1 3 Telephone List Micro Manager allows one to enter dialing parameters needed to establish a connection with each of your remote receivers The most notable parameter in these entries is the telephone number of the remote system Note that some spread spectrum radio modems still require a telephone number like means of identifying remote modems For example one TDMA spread spectrum modem vender uses the ATDT prefix but uses the remote modem s serial number in place of the telephone number Upon selecting the Phone List submenu entry of the Configuration menu you will be provided with a display similar to the following pa lrinphone ireclory Cae ASST T OTET eee ae With this window you can perform the following operations 1 Dial a remote system 2 Edit an entry in the telephone directory list 3 Create a new entry from and old entry 4 Create a new entry not based upon an old entry 5 Delete an entry 6 Import an exported telephone directory and 7 Export your telephone directory To perform an operation on any entry in the directory list you must first select that en
166. efore doing so some information about receiver modem strings needs to be discussed In Section 3 1 2 we described how modem strings are entered for the configuration of the modem attached to the Micro Manager computer In that section we described special characters that are translated by Micro Manager into delays and special control characters Those special characters are not available through this window That is the modem strings entered through this window will NOT be translated as described in Section 3 1 2 what you enter will be sent to the modem Also you should avoid using spaces in your receiver 129 modem strings unless the initialization of that modem absolutely requires that they be present The table that follows describes the modem parameters that can be defined when a USER DEFINED modem type is selected Parameter Description Initialization String The string that will be sent to the modem to initialize the modem This string will be sent whenever the receiver power is cycled or is commanded to initialize the modem The contents of the string depend upon the modem being used and you should consult your modem manual for specifics Finally the receiver will attach the proper end of line sequence required by the modem Config String This string is another initialization string sent to the receiver It is sent on the same events as is described for the Initialization String but will always be sent before the I
167. eiver port For most users this checkbox should be unchecked 1 e disabling the use of the DTR DSR handshaking for flow control For remote connections you will need to set this configuration depending on the type of modem that will be used to establish the remote connection For nearly all types of modems you will need to disable this setting i e have the checkbox unchecked Please see the appropriate modem manual for details on its DTR DSR signal use In most configurations this checkbox should be unchecked i e disabling DTR DSR for flow control Those who check this checkbox should have clear rationale as to why they should use the DTR DSR hardware handshaking For example there are certain Ashtech receivers and modems that do not employ the DTR DSR hardware handshaking for flow control In these cases Micro Manager needs to be made aware of the difference 3 1 1 3 6 Advanced Port Settings Direct Connection Turn Around Time Each Micro Manager installation can exhibit slight variations in system performance particularly in the area of RS 232 data communications Poor communication links operating system loads and other such factors can influence the RS 232 communication performance The default configuration of Micro Manager should handle nearly all of these variations The Direct Connect Turn Around Time parameter specifies the maximum amount of time in milliseconds between the issuance of a command to the receiver a
168. elected the directory containing the firmware files Micro Manager will automatically begin scanning and validating those files During this scanning and validation process the Status Information line will show the status of the validation process As can be seen in the above example window the status FAILED firmware File Validation was reported In fact selection of the above directory also yielded the following message from Micro Manager Cannot Find Firmware File xi The firmware file E TEMP1 M2CODE BIN Does not exist Please select another directory which contains the firmware files This message and the status displayed in the Firmware Upload window imply that the firmware directory selected 1 e E TEMP1 contains no valid firmware files to be uploaded to the receiver Notice also in the Firmware Upload window that the Start Upload and Config Protocol buttons are not enabled as indicated by their slightly grayed out appearance Consider the following window in contrast to the last window example Frimware Upload x r Select Firmware Directory AEMAILSWZFIRMWARE WWFB1 Browse Current Status Receiver Firmware Version FBO Free Receiver Memory 37697024 Firmware File Version FB1 Status Information Firmware Files Validated and Ready Jf Start Upload amp Config Protocol x Cancel ttt Ashtech In the above example window the selected firmware path does
169. en redials specifies the amount of time in seconds to wait between failed connection attempts The Maximum number of redials defines the number of attempts to establish the connection before terminating These two parameters are particularly important for unattended operations see Section 4 2 You should configure these parameters to suite your expected demands on your remote systems and the urgency to obtain the data For example if other users are dialing your remote receiver then you should set the Pause between redials to a large value to account for possible file download times by other users The last two parameters of this tab section deal with how to hang up the modem at the completion of communicating with the receiver Set DTR Low to Hang Modem when checked will cause Micro Manager to drop the RS 232 DTR status line signal to terminate the connection The Hang up Command text box defines the modem string to be sent by Micro Manager to terminate the connection Using both approaches is acceptable but are dependent upon the specifics of your modem Most Hayes compatible modems support both In the example provided in the above screen capture Micro Manager will send the Hayes compatible command attention sequence i e delay 3 times the amount of delay for the delay character and then send ATHO i e to hang the modem followed by the carriage return character After sending the Hang
170. en remote modem connections while the standard Micro Manager does not Additional features are being considered for Micro Manager Pro By product design and definition Micro Manager Pro has all of the features and functionality of Micro Manager plus additional features While both products may change and mature this assumption is expected to remain valid Please refer to the table below To verify which edition you have see the Help About window of the program When the professional configuration is in use a clear indication of the Professional version will be indicated 11 Current Features Micro Manager Micro Manager Pro 32 bit multitasking amp multithreaded Yes Yes architecture running on Windows 95 98 ME NT 2000 Windows Graphical User Interface Yes Yes Choice of GUI manual or Command Yes Yes Line automatic interface Ring file data control Yes Yes Receiver data file management Yes Yes Session programming Yes Yes Receiver script file uploading feature Yes Yes Powerful terminal window capability Yes Yes User configurable alerts Yes Yes Reliable firmware uploads Yes Yes Z modem protocol for data transfers Yes Yes File translations to Ashtech or RINEX Yes Yes formats RTCM base station configuration control Yes Yes status Built in user safeguards Yes Yes User configurable real time information Yes Yes screens Direct recei
171. en the screws of the sentinel key to connect the key securely to your computer If a printer was connected to your computer attach that cable to the sentinel If the sentinel cannot be installed because of an obstruction behind the computer you can place the sentinel key later in the parallel sequence for example you could attach the sentinel key to a DB 25 male to DB 25 female cable which is connected to your computer s parallel port 160 E 3 RUNNING XYZAshRx XYZAshRx creates RINEX Version 2 0 files from Raw Ashtech Observation files 1 e from Ashtech B Files The program can be manually instructed to convert files or can be called directly from the command line This latter method allows programs to invoke the converter without the need of human intervention Throughout the remainder of this documentation we will call the former approach the Manual GUI approach and the latter will be called the Command Line approach Both the Manual GUI and the Command Line approaches rely upon configuration information contained in the INI file associated with the converter program This INI file is called X YZAshRx INI and is stored in the same directory as the main program Changes to this configuration file occur whenever the user changes configuration using the Manual GUI approach That is when desiring to use the Command Line mode you should pre set the configuration using the Manual GUI approach Section E 3 1 will describe the Manual
172. ent Status Receiver Firmware Version juFs1 Free Receiver Memory 7644800 Firmware File Version jure Status Information How Replacing Receiver Firmware Wait 89 A Start Upload Config Protocol 5S Cancel t a Ashtech During this step the receiver validates the receiver firmware file before it actually replaces its operating firmware with the newly loaded firmware While the count down timer shown in the Status Information message Now Replacing Receiver Firmware Wait 89 is counting Micro Manager is awaiting a positive acknowledgement from the receiver that the firmware file is valid If the acknowledgement is received Micro Manager will display the following message New Firmware Loaded Ed Firmware upload appears successful This program will now terminate It is suggested that when you reconnect to this receiver that you reset its Internal amp External memory i This message indicates that the receiver has acknowledged the validity of the firmware files and is now actually burning that firmware for later use Because the burn operation will cause the receiver to restart communications with that receiver will be lost Thus Micro Manager will have to be terminated this will happen when you press the OK button of this window Notice also that the displayed message includes a suggestion about resetting the receiver s internal and external memory This is suggested for two reasons
173. entered through the Common Header tab of this window i e see Section 3 1 4 3 In the bottom section of this window one enters information about the sensors that are used to collect the meteorological data An example of the Pressure sensor tab is shown above The other two are shown below 48 Pressure Terparshea Hurrachilp Model z H Hirai Type ren Hurd ype Aceuriey T Appii Pomition lea prassa anenr postin Sepem Fosio Notice in each of the three tabbed areas related to meteorological sensors i e Pressure Temperature and Humidity that the data entry fields are essentially the same with the exception of the sensor position checkbox i e in the Approximate Position area of each For the pressure sensor the checkbox labeled as Use same position as that used for the RINEX observation is used when checked to set the pressure sensor location for the RINEX Meteorological file header data to the same position as that used for the observing site When unchecked you are given an opportunity to enter the coordinates of the sensor the Edit Position button can be used to enter the coordinates in other coordinate representations For the temperature and humidity sensors the equivalent checkbox is labeled as Use pressure sensor position When checked the RINEX Meteorological data file header record for the temperature and or humidity sensor position s will be the same as that specified for th
174. ents in addition to those made in this Agreement LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTANDS IT AND IS BOUND BY ITS TERMS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY THIS SOFTWARE PROGRAM AND DOCUMENTATION IS DISTRIBUTED AND LICENSED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED BY LICENSOR AND ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS WHO ALSO EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE PERFORMANCE FUNCTIONALITY ACCURACY OF DATA TITLE OR NONINFRINGEMENT LICENSOR AND ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS DO NOT WARRANT THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM OR DOCUMENTATION WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED ERROR FREE OR VIRUS FREE THE USER ASSUMES THE ENTIRE RISK OF USING THIS SOFTWARE PROGRAM AND DOCUMENTATION ANY LIABILITY OF LICENSOR ITS THIRD PARTY DISTRIBUTORS OR ANYONE ELSE INVOLVED IN THE CREATION OR DELIVERY OF THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM OR DOCUMENTATION IS LIMITED TO THE PURCHASE PRICE THEREOF THERE SHALL BE NO OTHER LIABILITY FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHETHER BASED ON BREACH OF WARRANTY BREACH OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM OR DOCUMENTATION OR THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES EVEN IF LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES MA
175. ers the DTR DSR hardware handshaking lines ARE NOT implemented As such Micro Manager must be configured according to the availability of the DTR DSR handshaking of the receiver or receiver port Section 3 1 1 3 5 describes the configuration of the DTR DSR hardware handshaking for direct connections Finally when Micro Manager has established a modem connection to the receiver see Section 4 1 2 you are strongly advised not to change the communication parameters of the local computer i e you should avoid using this window Changing these communication parameters when connected via modem may cause the modem to break the telephone connection If you must change the communication speed you are strongly encouraged to manually disconnect see Section 4 1 3 change the configuration of the local PC as desired and then re dial the telephone number of the target GPS receiver see Section 4 1 2 3 1 1 1 Configuration Port Settings Comm Port The port selection allows the operator to specify the communications port of the computer used to communicate with the Ashtech receiver The selectable values are COM1 to COM16 3 1 1 2 Configuration Port Settings BAUD The BAUD selection establishes the communications speed of the communications port of the computer used to communicate with the Ashtech receiver or the modem through which Micro Manager communicates with the receiver The selectable values are 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 1920
176. erter program This INI file is called UPackU12 INI and is stored in the same directory as the main program Changes to this configuration file occur whenever the user changes configuration using the Manual GUI approach That is when desiring to use the Command Line mode you should pre set the configuration using the Manual GUI approach Section F 3 1 will describe the Manual GUI approach to using UPackU12 and Section F 3 2 will describe the Command Line approach to using UPackU12 It is important to re state the fact that the configuration information is stored in the file UPackU12 INI which is stored in the same directory as the program file i e UPackU12 EXE When you desire an alternative configuration for example to support two Micro Manager installations simultaneously you should copy the following files to another directory UPackU12 INI UPackU12 EXE UPackU12 BMP By doing this you create an independent copy of the INI file Launching the program UPackU12 EXE in this copied directory causes the program to use the INI file in that directory This copy would utilize a configuration that is independent of the other copy i e the original copy of UPackU12 on your computer In contrast launching two copies of the UPackU12 from the same directory accesses the same INI file The configuration stored at the end of the runs of the programs depends on which copy of the program terminated first Needless to say you are
177. ery possibility would be near impossible The information contained in this section should be reviewed by your System and or Network Administrators After all they will be the ones that will make the necessary system and network configurations TRUMP has no embedded knowledge logic of networks It treats every file folder and sub folder as if it were on a local machine As an example some systems mount mapped drives Under Windows a mapped drive can be thought of as a virtual drive that resides on you local computer even though it may be accessing a drive that is physically located elsewhere in the network Windows allows TRUMP to access these drives as if they were located on the local computer Granted many such drives have restricted access but this will be discussed later For now let us assume that the permissions are such that the drive is completely open to TRUMP i e TRUMP can create and destroy files and directories 225 The flow of TRUMP is such that it scans for U Files in the U Files Search Directory see Section H 3 1 2 and its sub folders When it finds a U File it copies that U File to the Scratch Directory see Section H 3 1 5 Next it converts the scratch directory copy of the U File to Ashtech formatted B E S Files etc and if the RINEX option is enabled then to RINEX These converted files are stored in sub folders of the scratch directory After the conversion step it then mov
178. es needed to compute the differential corrector values and other values transmitted in RTCM messages The following is an example of this window Receiver Fixed Position Settings x M Fixed Position fs 27 141000 fs 55 657800 West Longitude 77 4012061667 fea 4 342199 Ellipsoid Height 23 950 ECEF X ECEF Y ECEF Z p 091087 0942 4881 725 7905 3943905 5506 YF Send X Cancel Ashtech Horth Latitude 38 4408725000 East Longitude 282 5987938333 T Parameter Description North Latitude The reference station position in WGS 84 geodetic East Longitude coordinates West Longitude Ellipsoidal Height ECEF Position X Y and Z The reference station position in WGS 84 Earth Centered Earth Fixed coordinates The positional data fields are very important These fields which allow you to enter a reference station position are used by the receiver for such operations as creating differential correctors when the receiver is used as an RTCM differential base station Any non zero values will cause the receiver to use that positional data When you set the Latitude East Longitude and Ellipsoidal Height to zero you are effectively deleting the reference position data If you set these to zero then the reference station position data in the Geodetic Position and Time Window as well as the Earth Centered Earth Fixed Position and Time Window will indicate that there is no referen
179. es stored by the receiver The Reset Receiver selection will provide you with a window that allows you to select various levels of receiver firmware including a full reset which resets the firmware back to the factory default settings and fully initializes the file storage area The Upload Firmware option permits you to upload firmware to the receiver Selecting the Settings option will cause Micro Manager to provide you with another menu that lists all of the windows that control the parameters of the receiver That is upon selecting the Settings menu option you will be presented with the following sub menu ET Cock Parameters hy Network Settings GR WI Port Settings gt Postion Ficed E Program Sessions FAL Project Information C fecording Controls Rica ATOH Setup Ty Satelite Tracking 107 Each of these menu options allow one to gain access to windows which control various settings of the receiver The Clock Parameters selection allows one to set the parameters governing the receiver clock and optional external frequency reference The Network Settings option provides a window through which one can set the network configuration of the iCGRS receiver Selecting the Port Settings option will cause the Receiver Port Settings Configuration window to be displayed The Position menu option will give you access to the receiver s reference position which is used when the receiver
180. es the Modem Initialization string Section 3 1 2 5 and the expected Command Complete string Section 3 1 2 7 of the modem configured for the program see Section 3 1 2 If the modem responds with the proper Command Complete string then Micro Manager concludes that a valid modem is attached to the computer on the specified communications port The third parameter i e the Automatically reopen displayed status windows on next start up establishes the behavior of the receiver status windows at the next start of the Micro Manager program When checked any receiver status windows that were displayed when Micro Manager was exited will automatically be reopened when Micro Manager is started again When unchecked none of the receiver status windows will be displayed on the next start of Micro Manager The selection of this parameter depends upon your operating environment For example if you normally connect to the same receiver at the same BAUD over the same communication ports receiver and personal computer then you will probably want this parameter CHECKED If this is not the case then you probably want this box unchecked The rationale is simply that whenever a receiver status window is displayed Micro Manager assumes that it is connected to a receiver and that the BAUD rate has been established between the receiver and your computer Following this assumption Micro Manager attempts to obtain status window information f
181. es the conversion output files and the scratch directory copy of the U File from the Scratch Directory to the final destination directories i e the Ashtech BES File Output Directory the RINEX Output Directory and the Processed U File Directory see Section H 3 1 2 The target directories i e the Ashtech BES File Output Directory the RINEX Output Directory and the Processed U File Directory can either be on the local system or at some other location on the network such as an FTP server When these target directories are at some other location they should appear as mapped drives or mapped files to TRUMP Of important note when the target directories include mnemonics TRUMP will create the destination folders if needed When this is true full permissions to create directories place files and destroy files at these target locations must be granted to TRUMP i e the account under which TRUMP runs The permissions that must be granted to the account under which TRUMP runs really depend upon how you set up your system For example if permissions granted for the U Files Search Directory are such that TRUMP cannot see the sub folders of that folder then TRUMP will not search those sub folders as it cannot see them It is recommended that the specified Scratch Directory be a local physical drive of your computer having full privileges so as to avoid permission conflicts For th
182. eseeeeeceeneeeeseeeeeeseneeetees 70 3 1 6 3 Specifying the File Output Directory cee ceeceecsseeeseeeseeeseeceseseeeecseeeaeeceeeesaeeeeaeees 70 3 1 6 4 File Transfers Protocol Parameters ccccccccccccccesscsscessesssesssesscesscesscssscssecuecseecsseesseees 71 3 1 6 5 Miscellaneous Configuration Items s sssseseseesesesessesesterestssssesesreresrssssesesreresrsrssesesreres 74 4 0 RUNNING Micro Manager OVER VIEW ssssssssssssssssssseseesessssseees 76 4 1 User Interactive Mode scdoiass ai svitecate slveassstdeaansoncig tivation thn eietiless 76 4 1 1 Main Display Window sccccssscssssssscessscssscssscssssscessecsssscscssscssccessoesssecsscssessseseoes 76 4 1 1 1 User Configurable Work Area icceceeescsessseseceeecsesenenensssececececessssseseacececeeseeseteseeeeeees 77 T 12 RS 232 Lime Status Indicators i ccccccscasscseceevcencossetencescessnceitesssusevcenevseeses a deeds sdeeveess 78 4 1 1 3 Connection Status Alert Status Icon ccc ccc cccesscesccescessccsecesecesecseecsescsseesseessesssesrees 78 4 1 1 4 Connection Status Information 0 0 cece ccccccsccscessesscesscesscssscesscseceeceecssessesssesees 79 4 1 2 Connecting to the GPS Receiver eessecssocesocesoccesecesocesecesocesocesocesocesooesoossoossoossoosssoseso 80 4 1 3 Terminating a Remote Connection with the GPS Receiver sessoessoesoooecooesooessosseo 81 6 4 1 4 Status and Display Sub Window scccscccsscscscs
183. eseseseseseesenes 27 3 1 1 3 1 Advanced Port Settings Parity 0 ccseeeenenenseeesecesesesssessssecececeeeeeeseeeseceseenes 28 3 1 1 3 2 Advanced Port Settings Data Bits 0 eecsesenseeesecesesesesesescecscsesesesesereseseeeenes 28 3 1 1 3 3 Advanced Port Settings Stop Bits 0 eceesenessesececesesesesesescscececeeeeseseseseceeeenes 28 3 1 1 3 4 Advanced Port Settings Use CTS RTS Hardware Flow Control 0 ee 29 3 1 1 3 5 Advanced Port Settings Use DTR DSR Hardware Flow Control 29 3 1 1 3 6 Advanced Port Settings Direct Connection Turn Around Time ee 29 3 1 2 M dem Settings ccsceccccciscassccsescscscstscas sossencs coceesecs soctsvessdcsesvecssecetbosessecsscsavsessssnssessdssapsee 30 3 1 2 1 Selecting an Existing Modem ceeceecesesesceseseseeeecseecaesesececseeeeaeeeeececaeeetaeeeeeeeeatees 32 3 1 2 2 Adding a Modem to the List of MOdeMS eee ceeeeeeseeeseseseeeseeeseeceaeeeeeeseseeseaeeeeeenenes 32 3 1 2 3 Deleting a Modem from the List of Modems cccccecceeeseeceseseeseceseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeenenes 32 3 1 2 4 Renaming a Modem in the List of Modems cceeceeseseseeeeceseeeeceseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeenes 32 3 1 2 5 Entering Editing the Modem Initialization Strings 0 0 ce eeceseeseeteeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeneees 32 3 1 2 6 Entering Editing the Modem Dialing and Hang up Strings eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 33 3 1 2 7 Entering Editing the Modem Response Parameters ccccececcseceseeeereeeneeeeeeseeen
184. esieseseetsseesiestssesrestesterrsstsresresterrrtnresrestereseesrenreset 125 4 1 5 4 2 Receiver Network Settings 0 ccesensesesssecesesesesssesesceceeeeesesececeeeeneneneneeeeeeeanes 126 4 125 4 3 R c ive r Port Seung os ic asec aii etetnn arti n a bite astern d ni oases attics 128 4 1 5 4 4 Receiver Fixed Position enneren T a EE AR 131 4 1 5 4 5 Programming SeSSIONS uneneen e isei e E A E 132 4 1 5 4 6 Project Intonnatiois ennn ae a a a a a a option tee Ea 135 4154 7 Recordin E Control Seisi eraron a e E e e o pwede 137 4 1 5 4 8 RTCM Configuration ene neria ai ra E a OE AEREE 139 4 1 5 4 9 Satellite Tracking WindoW e ssessesisssersseesresrssesresrssresrsesresresterrrtnresresteresresresreset 143 4 1 6 Terminal Window eseseeeeeeeeeosorsesesesesererereceeeosorcrceoeeeeesererorereceerorereeeesororerseeeseeererereeee 144 4 2 Command Line Mode ssssssssessesessssesesssssesessereeeesssreceesssreeeesssreeeessseeeeesss 148 APPENDIX A FILE NAMING APPROACH ccssessssssssssssssseesenseeeseseees 151 sT A 2 U File File Naming APProdch cccccccccscsssevsscecssversssssssssevsssssssseeassssssssssees 151 A 2 LOG File Naming Approach eccsccccscesssssvevsscsssssesssessssssssssssssssseassssssssssees 152 APPENDIX B ASCII CONTROL CHARACTERS i cccsssssssssssesseseesesees 153 APPENDIX C UPLOAD FILE FORMAT csessscesssssssssssssseseessnsecsteseenesees 155 APPENDIX D DIALING DIRECTORY EXPORT FILE FORMAT 157
185. et directory 3 1 6 4 File Transfers Protocol Parameters Micro Manager uses a Z Modem protocol for file transfers The Z Modem protocol is used for file downloads and firmware file uploads There are seven parameters that govern the handshaking during a Z Modem file transfer three of which are the same for both file upload and file download operations The settings of these parameters normally need not be changed However they can be altered to improve the performance of file transfers particularly when bad 71 telephone connections are expected In order to understand how to change these parameters one must be somewhat familiar with how the Z Modem file transfer protocol functions To start the file transfer the Z Modem participants exchange several specialized packets of information Through these packets the sender and receiver negotiate the rules governing the transfer This negotiation can take several packets of information and is completely transparent to you the user The Z Modem protocol definition in and of itself does not specify any timeouts for this initial negotiation However we have provided such a timeout through the Protocol Start Up Timeout parameter This parameter specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds that Micro Manager will permit for a transfer to start once the first negotiation packet is exchanged If the protocol transfer does not start within the timeout period the transfer will be terminat
186. f its specified operating environments e g extremely hot environments which are outside the specified operation temperature range When total memory utilized by non U files and bad sectors surpasses a pre defined amount which is editable by you as explained later the following message will be displayed in the lower left area of the Receiver Files window When this message is displayed you can instruct the receiver to delete any non U files from the receiver s memory This is accomplished by right clicking in the directory listing area of the Receiver Files window The right click operation will cause a pop up menu to be displayed and by selecting the Delete Non U files entry which is displayed in the pop up menu only when the above warning message is displayed Micro Manager will issue a command to the receiver instructing it to delete all non U files After the non U file delete command is issued Micro Manager will re request the receiver s directory information and the warning message should be removed If after the directory information is reloaded the warning message has not been removed there can only be two causes 112 A The receiver did not receive and process the non U file deletion command because of communication errors or B There are a rather large number of bad blocks or bad sectors flagged in the receiver s memory When either occurs the following procedure is recommended 1 Reissue the no
187. f the conversion process yields no data for a given file that file will be removed from the system upon completion of the conversion process In the above example window the conversion has completed and there were no records written for the Event and Photo files As such these files will be erased from the system 184 F 3 2 Command Line Approach The Command Line approach to running UPackU 12 is invoked by calling the program with the command line parameters listed in this section The Command Line approach permits automatic conversion to raw Ashtech data files without human intervention In this way programs or batch files can call UpackU12 to perform conversions Before continuing it is important to re state that there is a default output path Sections F 3 1 1 described the setting of this default output path This is important because the command line mode of this program will use this default path unless the output path command line option is specified When the command line Output Path option is specified the default output path will be overridden for that run only The general form of the command line call to UPackU12 is as follows UpackU12 exe C Ufilename idx N template P outpath Use the C Ufilename for automatic decompression of an Ashtech U XII receiver image file These files are typically created by Micro Manager Here the Ufilename is the full path name including drive directory and name of t
188. f the program for that host site Example 2 XYZs_FTP exe H XYZs FTP Site U D Test TestFile BIN T web plots In this example the program is instructed to establish a connection with the configured FTP host named XYZs FTP Site and upload the file D Test TestFile BIN into the FTP target directory web plots Example 3 XYZs_FTP ex H XYZs FTP Site c web plots In this example the program is instructed to establish a connection with the configured FTP host named XYZs FTP Site and make the directory web plots To reiterate if any of your command line FTP operations could cause multiple copies of XYZs_FTP to be running simultaneously it is highly recommended that the Q option be added to each of the command line calls 203 Appendix H Utility Program Thales Resident U File unpacking Manager Program TRUMP H 1 Introduction to TRUMP TRUMP EXE written by The XYZ s of GPS Inc was designed to automate manage the process of converting Ashtech U Files to Ashtech formatted raw GPS observation files and to Receiver INdependent EXchange RINEX files TRUMP was primarily designed to run in conjunction with Ashtech s iCGRS receivers where the receivers use a File Transfer Protocol FTP to push U Files to a computer network on which TRUMP resides In this scenario TRUMP continuously runs on the FTP push target computer or network searching for the arrival of recently pushed U Files Upon finding a U F
189. f these platforms Your disk space requirements will vary depending upon your unique installation and data collection needs Micro Manager actually requires less than 25 Megabytes of disk space to store the program and its ancillary files but it is recommended that your available disk space be much larger to accommodate your data storage needs Storage solutions such as ZIP 100 MB or 250 MB and JAZ 1 or 2 GB from Iomega provide but two examples of alternate storage solutions To optimize the performance of Micro Manager please give special consideration to the PC you choose to run the software It is important to choose a leading brand system to avoid less capable components such as serial cards often found in cheap knock offs Although Micro Manager will run on most all Intel and AMD processors 486 and up it s performance may be superior on a well built Pentium system specifically designed for Windows NT 2000 To communicate with remotely located receivers you will need a minimum of two modems i e one for the computer and one for every remotely located GPS receiver Thales Navigation recommends that you utilize modems from the same manufacturer throughout your installation to avoid compatibility problems Furthermore Thales Navigation recommends that you use either US Robotic Courier or Sportster Modems Check with Thales Navigation regarding other modems including spread spectrum type radio modems It should be emphasized that T
190. fault settings associated with this new firmware 117 2 You simply want to reset the firmware back to the factory default settings 3 You suspect that you had a power supply problem that has corrupted the operation of the receiver 4 You want to reset the file storage memory which erases it but gives you a positive response on the health of the memory board Firmware resets DO NOT alter options currently set in the receiver For example if your receiver was initially shipped without the RTK mode enabled and you later received an update that enabled the RTK mode a firmware reset WILL NOT disable the RTK mode Or said differently a firmware reset can reset the firmware back to the factory defaults for the receiver options that are currently available for that receiver There are two general types of reset operations that can be performed one of which permits several options The type of reset operation and its options depends upon what exactly you wish to accomplish All of these choices have been merged into one convenient window that will prevent incorrect or confusing reset modes It is important to note that while this window does impose logic to avoid these incorrect or confusing modes you can still use the terminal window of Micro Manager see 4 1 6 to perform any type of reset allowed under the receiver command structure The Receiver Reset Window shown below is divided up into two primary sections Heceveer Reet Wirth
191. following is an example of the RINEX Site Position Window RINEX Site Position 2x Approximate Position Horth Latitude 39 1301210262 bs a 48 435694 East Longitude 282 7849427168 282 g 5 793781 West Longitude 77 2150572832 wm h2 54 206219 Ellipsoid Height 117 935 ECEF X ECEF Y ECEF Z fi 096351 4093 4831485 5222 1003607 4647 The RINEX Site Position Window allows you to specify the position of the receiver to be output as part of the RINEX header data The RINEX specification indicates that this position need only be approximate and provides no specifics on the required accuracy of the approximation The position written as part of the header data can come from a manually entered position or from a weighted average comprising the position and PDOP data of the B File To specify that the approximate position is to come from the weighted average of the B File position data check the Get Position from B File Data checkbox Otherwise uncheck the box and enter the approximate position in the window Like the RINEX Header Data Options window the data entered into this window will be saved as part of the configuration information for the program If the Get Position from B File Data checkbox is checked then XYZAshRx will obtain the approximate position from B File on the current and later runs E 3 1 2 RINEX Meteorological Files Before continuing it must be noted that the meteorol
192. fter the actual telephone number is sent Section 3 1 3 and its sub sections describe the entry of telephone numbers The Maximum wait time for connect defines the maximum number of seconds to allow the modem to actually establish the connection with the remote system When attempting to establish a connection Micro Manager starts a timer just after sending the dialing suffix If the modem does not report a connection i e to the GPS receiver see Section 4 1 2 within the specified time then Micro Manager terminates the connection attempt It is important to note that this value only specifies how long Micro Manager will wait for the modem to indicate that a valid connection with a remote modem has been established That is modems have their own parameters i e independent of the Maximum wait time for connect parameter of Micro Manager and timers which govern how long the modem will wait for the detection of a remote modem carrier signal For example the S7 register of a US Robotics Sportster modem is typically set to 60 seconds by the factory If a valid connection is not established within this amount of 33 time the modem will signal Micro Manager that the connection attempt failed In summary when you change the Maximum wait time for connect within Micro Manager you also should set the associated register of the modem to the same value in the modem initialization strings see Section 3 1 2 5 The Pause betwe
193. gned to work in 14 concert with such packages Thales Navigation recommends obtaining commercially available and well recognized software systems to support these needs Micro Manager is further extended in that it supports features of the iCGRS receiver Micro Manager contains a special iCGRS network configuration screen that assists in the network configuration of an iCGRS receiver Furthermore the utility program TRUMP which is supplied in the suite of utilities included with Micro Manager can be used to automatically convert U Files into it constituent processing files e g Ashtech B E and S Files as well as RINEX data files That is TRUMP was designed to be a resident program on the target system network of U Files pushed to an FTP site by an iCGRS receiver When new U files arrive on that system network TRUMP automatically will perform the conversions specified by the operator For complete details on TRUMP please see Appendix H 1 1 Minimum System Requirements Micro Manager requires a Windows 95 98 ME NT 2000 based computer While Micro Manager requires less than 10 megabytes of memory to run Windows platforms impose higher minimums It is recommended for performance reasons that your computer have no less than 32 megabytes of RAM memory for Windows 95 98 ME and 64 megabytes for Windows NT 2000 platforms Thales Navigation strongly recommends either a Windows NT or Windows 2000 platform because of the true 32 bit nature o
194. h name of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File MMME The 3 character month name of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File DDS The 2 digit day of the month of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File DDE The 2 digit day of the month of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File DDDS The 3 digit day of the year of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File DDDE The 2 digit day of the year of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File RXDDD _ The 3 digit day of the year used in naming any RINEX files HHS The 2 digit hour of the GPS day of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File 217 The 2 digit hour of the GPS day of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File A single character that represents the start GPS hour of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File A single character that represents the end GPS hour of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File The 2 digit minute of the GPS hour of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File The
195. hales Navigation does not support all modems so it is necessary to verify that the modems you wish to use are supported 15 1 2 Demo Modes of Micro Manager There are two basic modes of Micro Manager fully operational and demonstration i e demo This document applies to both modes Demo modes which are freely distributed over the Internet or provided on diskette have a greatly reduced capability when compared with a fully operational program but do not require a sentinel key Demos will differ from operational programs by disallowing at least the following 1 all file download and delete features 2 the editing of receiver control parameters and 3 the command line features Basically the demos permit one to observe but not to accomplish One can obtain a Demo Micro Manager from the Reference Station link on the Ashtech web page at the following address http www ashtech com 16 Chapter 2 Installation Instructions 2 0 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW From a total system perspective there are two primary sides of the installation process 1 installing hardware and 2 installing software The primary purpose of this manual is to describe the installation and use of the Micro Manager software package We will not provide in depth installation guidelines and steps for hardware installation we refer you to the appropriate computer and receiver manuals for details We will however introduce some important GPS receiver modem and c
196. he Q parameter is not used the master slave relationship is not used and the above mentioned race condition can occur The general form of the command line call to XYZs_FTP is as follows XYZs_FTP EXE options secondary_args Many options require secondary arguments Each option will now be described The symbol for the option is not case sensitive H hostname This command line option is used to specify the Host FTP site that you desire to connect with for the given command line operation Here you specify the unique descriptive host name configured as described in Section G 3 1 1 1 Please note that if the configured host site name contains spaces you should bound the name by double quote characters e g XYZs FTP Site Please note that it is intended that this command line parameter be used in conjunction with either the U or C command line parameters C newhostpath M This command line option is used for the automatic creation of a directory on the FTP host system assuming that the access account grants such privileges specified using the H command line parameter Please note that as long as the top level path in the specified newhostpath exists XYZs_FTP will attempt to create any missing sub directories in the path specified This command line option is intended to be used with other command line options The option instructs the XYZs_FTP program that it is to start up as a minimized program This comma
197. he Ring File StorageMode please consult the receiver manuals It is important to note that when the receiver is in the Ring File Storage mode and you are downloading files see Section 4 1 5 1 there is a possibility that the file being downloaded can be deleted by the receiver When this occurs the receiver will terminate the download operation While Micro Manager will report this as an error and will not perform any automatic conversions of that file the portion of the file downloaded will be resident on your hard drive You can later manually convert this file to other Ashtech file formats or RINEX by using UpackU12 EXE supplied with Micro Manager Use unhealthy sats in pos computation This parameter when checked will instruct the receiver to use satellites flagged as unhealthy in their broadcast orbit data in the position computation 138 Parameter Description Save user Indicates whether or not various receiver parameters e g satellite elevation parameters mask and epoch interval will be saved between receiver power cycles i e turned off and then later turned back on For uZ CGRS receivers this parameter will always be On i e the receiver is always in Save Mode For other uZ Family receivers the save mode is selectable and can be configured through Micro Manager The value reported here is the value set by the receiver command PASHS SAV command Please
198. he fixed receiver position stored in the receiver The following are two examples of this window Geodetic Position and Time Geodetic Position and Time In the first example a reference position has been set in the receiver see Section 4 1 5 4 4 In the second example a reference position has not been set in the receiver 85 The Geodetic Position and Time window is divided into three parts 1 The current GPS and GMT time reported by the receiver 2 the current point position computed by the receiver and 3 the reference station position The upper area of the window contains the GPS and GMT time reported by the receiver The middle portion contains information obtained from the most recent point position solution reported by the receiver The lower portion of the window contains the reference position information configured for the receiver see Section 4 1 5 4 4 When no reference station position information has been stored by the receiver all components of the lower portion of the window will be displayed as none i e no fixed position entered As with all other windows in the program Micro Manager will show the units of a displayed field if you rest the cursor over that field for a couple of seconds Also please see the Section 4 1 4 note on how Micro Manager queries data for this window from the receiver 4 1 4 5 Receiver Information Window The Receiver Information window displays various information a
199. he sender can respond to the recipient s interruption packet the sender has already sent the next packet which will be discarded The larger the Block Size the longer it will take to recover from an error On the other hand the larger the Block Size the fewer the overhead bytes required to transfer the file The question still remains as to how one should set the Transfer Block Size parameter The answer is really quite simple Use the default settings as a baseline for normal relatively noise free installations During file transfer operations observe the status information presented particularly when the status indicates transfer errors When the transfer errors occur Micro Manager and the receiver will through the Z Modem protocol mechanism enter a recovery process Observe the amount of time required to recover from the error not the number of errors that have occurred If your connection is relatively noisy and file transfers seem to spend a large amount of time in the error recovery process then consider decreasing the Transfer Block Size by a factor of 2 In general decreasing the block size increases the total amount of overhead required but promotes a faster recovery from communication errors while increasing the block size decreases the overhead requirements but causes the error recovery processing time to increase The last parameter of this window deals with partial firmware file uploads Thales
200. he source receiver image file Use the N template only in conjunction with the C parameter It is used to set the template name of the output files when you wish to override the automatic naming within the program For example if you desire the output B File name to be BASHTA99 010 then set this parameter to ASHTA99 010 That is the file names will be created using the file type as the first character and the value of the template as the remaining characters Use the P outpath only in conjunction with the C parameter It is used to set the output path of the converted files When this parameter is not specified the program will use the output path configured during the last interactive mode run of the program Example 1 UpackU 12 exe C D NBS5 REMOTE DAT UNBS5A99 010 In this example UPackU12 has been instructed to automatically convert the file D NBSS REMOTE DAT UNBS5A99 010 The output file name will automatically be generated based upon the receiver file information stored in the image file The output directory will be that configured during the last interactive mode run of the program Example 2 UpackU 12 exe C D NBS5 REMOTE DAT UNBS5A99 010 N XXXXA99 011 In this example UPackU12 has been instructed to automatically convert the file D NBSS REMOTE DAT UNBS5A99 010 The output file names will employ the 185 template XXXXA99 011 The output directory will be that configured during the last interactive mode run of
201. he window 82 The row labeled Satellite PRN is used to show which satellite by its Pseudo Random Noise number is being tracked on each channel Columns which are mostly empty and have the SRC status below the PRN ID show channels which are not actually tracking satellites however tracking is being attempted i e the receiver is in a search mode on those channels The rows labeled L1 C A S N L1 P S N and L2 P S N display the signal to noise value reported by the receiver for that satellite on the L1 C A Code tracking loop the L1 P Code tracking loop and the L2 P Code tracking loop respectively For specifics on the exact meaning of the reported signal to noise values you should consult your receiver manual The rows labeled L1 C A Cnt L1 P Cnt and L2 P Cnt display the continuous tracking count values reported by the receiver on the L1 C A Code tracking loop the L1 P Code tracking loop and the L2 P Code tracking loop respectively These continuous tracking counters are used to indicate how long the tracking loop has maintained lock The counters will reset to zero when loss of lock occurs and increase while continuous tracking is maintained Once a counters reaches 999 it will stay at 999 until a loss of lock is reported by the receiver Again for specifics on the exact meaning on the continuous tracking counters consult your receiver manual The Elevation
202. heir minimum Log Files contain the diagnostic messages generated by Micro Manager for an entire GPS day The format of the Log File name is described in Appendix A 2 The Display verbose diagnostic messages checkbox controls the level of diagnostic messages written to the Diagnostic Messages window see Section 4 1 4 1 Some users may not be interested in seeing all of the diagnostic messages Leaving this checkbox unchecked keeps the diagnostic messages to a minimum i e displaying only critical messages The system resources e g CPU time of some older computers may be unnecessarily taxed when updates occur in the Diagnostic Messages Display window Leaving this checkbox unchecked will help to free up some of these resources 3 1 6 3 Specifying the File Output Directory Upon selection of the Outputs tab of the Miscellaneous Configuration Options a window similar to the following will be displayed 70 The currently selected output path is displayed in this window You cannot directly edit the output path hence the grayed background color of the edit box for the current path However you can use the Browse button to locate an exiting target directory and or create new directories Upon selecting a new output path and closing this window with the OK button the diagnostics Log File see Section 3 1 6 2 if open at the time of the directory change will close and a new one will open in the targ
203. ical File Selection Window presented in Section E 3 1 2 Through both of these windows you will select the input and output files of a single conversion run When you select the Help menu item from the main menu you will be presented with the following drop down menu When you select the About menu item XYZAshRx will display a window containing information about the program In response to selecting the Command Line Parameters item XYZAshRx will display a window describing how to invoke the Command Line Mode of the program The command line mode is further documented in Section E 3 2 of this manual 163 E 3 1 1 File Selection Window The File Selection Window is displayed in response to the Convert To Rinex selection from the program s main menu The following provides an example of the File Selection Window RINEX Conversion File Selection Window Ea M Source Files B E z18 sample Baaaaa98 082 E E z18 sample Eaaaaa9 082 Browse S E z18 sample Saaaaa9s 082 Browse 1H Browse RIHEX Output Options 0 E z18 sample aaaa0s21 980 Browse H E z18 sample aaaa0821 98H Browse G E z18 sample aaaa0821 986 Browse S OK X Cancel Soe There are seven edit fields in this window The first four correspond to the following input file names B Input Ashtech formatted B File raw observations Yes The latter 3 edit
204. icipating as RTCM remote receivers However at the time of the 89 publication of this document Thales Navigation had not fully tested the support of the uZ Family receivers as RTCM remote stations in the Micro Manager environment In this document we will nevertheless fully describe the information displayed by remote RTCM participants but caution the user that they use this option at their own risk To distinguish which mode the receiver is in one must view the upper section of the RTCM status window In particular one should pay attention to the value of the RTCM Mode parameter Below are screen captures from Micro Manager when the receiver is in each of the three RTCM modes Base Station Mode Remote Station Mode and non participating respectively RTCM Mode Base Type fi Station 123 Ref Health 0 seq 2 Z Count 2579 4 on AGE RTCM Status Window x RTCM Mode Remote Type ft Stationim e99 Ref Health 6 Seq m pme Z Count 2345 0 oa 100 0 Age 999 RTCH Status Window x RTCM Mode Jorr Type E Station IU Ref Health E Seg amp i Zz Gount On AGE ml Notice in the above windows examples that some fields are disabled denoted by the light gray in different modes This is because these fields are not applicable under those modes For example the QA parameter a parameter that describes the quality of communications based upon received RTCM messages is reported
205. icro Manager has no way to verify this when the command is created If no C File is created during the conversion process the post download command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post download command CF The name of the C File converted from the downloaded receiver file does not include drive letter and pathname See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert downloaded receiver files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message Depending upon the receiver configuration a C File may not be output through the conversion process Micro Manager has no way to verify this when the command is created If no C File is created during the conversion process the post download command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post download command 53 Description The name of the D File converted from the downloaded receiver file includes full path See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert downloaded receiver files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning
206. if supplied when the input meteorological data is an Ashtech D File Notice that the gpswk and gpswksec parameters are optional However if you specify either then you must specify both even if gpswksec is zero If you choose not to specify the start time of the file the program will use the current CPU time to determine the start day of the data you are strongly encouraged to avoid this approach Both field will be ignored if the input file is an Ashtech D File containing meteorological data because the D Files contain unambiguous time stamps All other parameters used in the conversion such as leap seconds and header data see Section E 3 1 2 will use values maintained from the last GUI run of the program The following provides an example XYZAshRx M A99005 NMA N1020051 99M 991 176752 In this example the converter uses the file A99005 NMA from the current working directory as the input meteorological data file The output RINEX meteorological data file will be placed in the file N1020051 99M Furthermore the converter will use the GPS time 991 176752 i e the GPS week and seconds of GPS Week respectively to designate the start day of the source meteorological data Notice that 176752 does not fall on an exact day boundary This is acceptable because the source data is time stamped with time of day Therefore the specified GPS time need only be accurate to the day in which the data falls as the converter will resolve the time of
207. ile TRUMP calls UpackU12 EXE to convert those files to Ashtech raw GPS observation files Optionally TRUMP can then call XYZAshRx EXE to convert those Ashtech raw GPS observation files to RINEX files Finally TRUMP can execute a set of user defined post convert commands for each U file converted in this process This program has been designed to operate on a Windows 95 98 NT 2000 platform To facilitate a wide variety of users TRUMP can be configured and run through normal Windows Graphical User Interfaces GUD or launched directly from the command line That is a user can use this program just like most other Windows programs or TRUMP can be executed without need of human intervention For example TRUMP can be launched from other programs such as Ashtech s Micro Manager Software from a DOS command line or from batch files RINEX data is output under the RINEX Version 2 0 standard The specification for this version of RINEX came from Dr Werner Gurtner s paper RINEX The Receiver Independent Exchange Format Version 2 Revised in July of 1998 H 1 1 Minimum System Requirements TRUMP requires the target platform to be a Windows 95 98 NT 2000 based computer While TRUMP requires less than 10 megabytes of memory to run Windows 95 and NT impose higher minimums You should consult the appropriate Microsoft documentation to determine the minimum system requirements for Windows 204 TRUMP requires less than 10 megabytes of d
208. ill be sorted Medium confidence that the file is a true receiver image file Unsorted sectors will be sorted as part of the conversion process Mostly Disordered may not be U File Low confidence that the file is a true receiver image file Unsorted sectors will be sorted as part of the conversion process Disordered likely not a U File Very Low confidence that the file is a true receiver image file Unsorted sectors will be sorted as part of the conversion process The table that follows describes the fields of the Output file Information area It is important to note that while the output files are automatically named when the input image file is specified you have the opportunity to change the output file names Once you change any output file name the Revert to Auto Names will become enabled This button when active and pressed instructs UpackU12 to ignore all of your name editing changes and re display the automatically generated names Field Description Target Dir The path of the output files that will be created during the conversion process B File The name of the output observation file called a B File This file is created when the image file was stored using Ranger Mode 0 see your Receiver s Operations Manual for details C File The name of the output corrected position file called a C File This file is created when the image file was stored using Ranger Mode 2 s
209. ill only generate file names that fall into one of those divisions For example when the parameter is set to 900 seconds which means 15 minutes the mm parameter can take on only 4 values 00 15 30 and 45 In generating the file names Micro Manager will determine which code should be used For example if the file actually starts at 16 minutes into the hour mm will be 15 Likewise if the file actually starts at 29 minutes into the hour mm will still be 15 because the data does not belong in the file that starts 30 minutes into the hour 3 1 4 2 Site Tab of RINEX Configuration Window The following shows an example of the Site tab of the RINEX Configuration Window listers tiedee SE Cemprentinmier piares Binion Brimil ll ee eR rn eo Re a me Pr h Do bi Teu map onm ian i daire i aahi ai ea Dmi iaia meer by I po ipl ii As was stated earlier Micro Manager maintains a table of RINEX configuration data that is indexed by site name Itis through this tab section that one manipulates i e adds removes or changes the names of each site To select a particular site choose the desired site using the drop down list box labeled Site Once the desired site is selected the remaining edit fields of the window i e in the other tabbed sections of the window will be set to display and edit the RINEX configuration data associated with that site If the desired site
210. in the command line call and PKZIP can then run without human interaction The basic problem is how can Micro Manager call these programs and provide information that these programs need For example how can Micro Manager call PKZIP with the name of the receiver data file just downloaded After all with each file downloaded the name of the receiver file changes The answer is Mnemonics A Mnemonic is a placeholder for an entity that will later be replaced by an actual value For example Micro Manager maintains a mnemonic for the name of a U File as UF Notice that the Mnemonic both starts and ends with a dollar character This is because Micro Manager must recognize the entities i e mnemonics that will later be substituted with actual values To re write the above example in a Micro Manager mnemonic form we would write the following PKZIP MYZIPFIL SUFS Later when this post download needs to be executed the name of the downloaded receiver file for example UJHARNAO1 233 will be substituted for the UF mnemonic That is the post download command is first translated and then executed In this example the post download command would be translated as follows PKZIP MYZIPFIL UHARNA01 233 Again the mnemonics act as placeholders for actual values that will be substituted just before the command is executed For those readers that have never written a program this is a form of programming i e you will be wr
211. ing reported in the Type 2 message Seq The RTCM Sequence Number SQNU attached to the RTCM Type 2 message 93 Field Description SVPRN The SVPRN row displays the GPS satellite numbers for which there are RTCM correctors in the Type 2 message PRC The change in the Pseudo Range Correctors meters for each satellite as caused by a change in the satellite navigation message RRC The change in Range Rate Correctors meters second for each satellite as caused by a change in the satellite navigation message IODE The Issue of Data Ephemeris for each satellite prior to the change in the satellite navigation message UDRE The User Differential Range Error for each satellite corrector as obtained with the navigation data prior to the change 4 1 4 6 3 RTCM Type 3 Display RTCM Type 3 messages communicate the Reference Station Parameters i e the position of the reference receiver The screen capture that follows shows an example display generated by Micro Manager to report RTCM Type 3 messages The display shows the last RTCM Type 3 message sent Type 1 Type2 Type 3 Type 6 Type 9 Type 15 Type 16 Type 18 Type 19 Type 20 Type 21 ty gt Time Of Message 17 26 48 00 age 00 00 38 85 Station ID pias Z Count 1620 0 Ref Health po Seq po p Horth Latitude 38 4408725034 e fe franos East Longitude 282 5987937879 s2 s ss sszes7 West Longitu
212. ing the configuration of Micro Manager The ancillary program files installed when Micro Manager is installed include the programs UPACKU12 exe XYZAshRx exe XYZs_FTP exe and TRUMP exe The programs UPACKU12 exe and XYZAshRx exe convert receiver memory files to standard Ashtech GPS data files and to RINEX respectively The program X YZs_FTP exe is a command line callable program that can be used with the Post Download feature of Micro Manager to FTP files to and create directories on remote FTP servers assuming that the system network administrator of that system has given you permission to do so TRUMP which described in Appendix H has primarily been designed with the iCGRS U File FTP push capability in mind That is iCGRS receivers can be configured to push data to an FTP site When TRUMP is running on that FTP system it can automatically convert the received U Files into normal data processing files e g Ashtech B E and S Files and RINEX files and run Post Convert Commands after those files have been converted 2 2 1 The Installation Process The Micro Manager Installer comes in one of three typical forms 1 a CD ROM based installer 2 a diskette based installer or 3 an installer suite downloaded over the Internet from the Ashtech Web page The CD ROM is the most common method used especially for new installations The Internet Web approach is the most common method used to obtain updates Each of these installers has a commo
213. ion 4 1 5 1 1 Only after the files are successfully downloaded and converted when appropriate will Micro Manager begin the process of deleting the selected files The deletion process operates as described under Section 4 1 5 1 2 The downloaded files are stored in the Ashtech U File format The U File format is also referred to as the uZ Receiver image format This is based upon a proprietary compression formulation To convert these files to normal receiver data files such as the Ashtech B E and S Files you will need to run UpackU12 either automatically see Section 4 1 5 1 or manually see Appendix F It is important to note that if an image file is partially downloaded it will not be automatically decompressed or converted to RINEX Furthermore Micro Manager will not perform the deletion processing Partially downloaded files occur when you press the Cancel button of this window or too many errors occur in the transfer Furthermore if you attempt to manually decompress partial receiver image files i e using UpackU12 the unpacking program will report checksum errors and only decompress a portion of that file 4 1 5 2 Resetting Receiver Firmware Built into Micro Manger is the ability to reset the receiver s firmware There are various reasons why one would want to reset the receiver s firmware examples of which include the following 1 You have just loaded firmware and want to reset the receiver to the factory de
214. ion The Earth Centered Earth Fixed coordinate correction values WGS 84 Corrections for that are to be applied to the position reported in the Type 3 message X Y and Z North Latitude The geodetic position WGS 84 of the reference RTCM receiver identified by the Station ID field of the message The values presented in these fields are the corrected receiver coordinates i e Type 3 message position plus the Type 22 position corrections Ellipsoid Height ECEF X The Earth Centered Earth Fixed coordinates WGS 84 of the reference ECEF Y and RTCM receiver identified by the Station ID field of the message The ECEF Z values presented in these fields are the corrected receiver coordinates i e Type 3 message position plus the Type 22 position corrections Delta North Provides the change to the Geodetic coordinates of the Type 3 message in Delta East and meters of North East and Height respectively due to the correction Delta Height supplied in the Type 22 message 4 1 4 7 Satellite Visibility Window The Satellite Visibility Window provides a polar plot of the satellites in view i e above the horizon of the receiver 105 Satellite Visibility Xx H38 440886350 E282 598739933 31 684 ee 310 11 300 230 70 280 80 270 190 260 lt Hoo y a 4 2504 lt jao 240 g 120 230 200190 jag 70180 The polar plot is an Azimuth Elevation
215. ion about the last message sent or received including the time of that message this information is obtained from the valid RTCM status information messages reported by the GPS receiver Please note that the GPS receiver reports what has been sent to Micro Manager and that Micro Manager does not get an actual copy of the message sent or received over the receiver s RTCM port That is Micro Manager is monitoring the receiver s indication of the messages not the actual messages themselves When the GPS receiver is configured for RTCM base or remote one of its communication ports is used to transmit or receive the RTCM data Micro Manager communicates with the receiver using one of its other communication ports The GPS receiver provides Micro Manager with RTCM related status messages These status messages contain information about what was sent or received Because of normal data communication delays and errors that can occur between two communicating devices some status messages can be lost or delayed Micro Manager continuously senses the communication load between it and the GPS receiver and adjusts the frequency at which it requests status messages from the GPS receiver to avoid overrunning the communication link Therefore Micro Manager may not always obtain all of the current RTCM status information from the GPS receiver It is important to note that Micro Manager supports the configuration and display of uZ Family receivers part
216. is an RTK or RTCM base station The Project Information menu option gives one access to various information that is used to document the project information stored with each observation file including the 4 character site ID Selecting the Program Sessions option gives one access to the receiver s session programming features The RTCM Setup option provides a window through which you can configure the RTCM modes and capabilities of the receiver The Satellite Tracking option provides a window through which you control the satellites tracked by the receiver 4 1 5 1 Downloading and Deleting Receiver Files By selecting the Files sub menu option of the Receiver main menu you will be provided with a window similar to the following Receiver Files r Receiver Files Total Files 8 IV Decompress files to Ashtech processing data file e g B File E File S Files etc IV Convert decompressed files to RINEX RINEX Config J Launch Post Download Commands after downloads and conversions E a ooo _ Ho UKENFK02 016 0 016 10 00 00 016 11 00 00 71680 2 Ho UKENFL02 016 0 016 11 00 00 016 12 00 00 75776 3 Wo UKEHFM02 016 o 01642 00 00 016 13 00 00 66560 Ho UKENFHO2 016 o 016 13 00 00 016 14 00 00 71680 5 No UKENFO02 016 o 016 44 00 00 016 15 00 00 75776 e No UKENFP02 016 0 016 15 00 00 016 16 00 00 79872 7 vo UKENFQ02 016
217. isk space However TRUMP creates output files from your raw GPS receiver files i e from U files that originate from the Ashtech uZ family of receivers Some of these files are ASCII while others are binary Generally however one can expect the output Ashtech raw observation files created from these U files are at least 2 times larger than their source U files and that the ASCII output files about 1 5 times as larger than the created raw observation files H 2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW TRUMP is currently distributed as part of Micro Manager The program will be installed in the same directory as that of MicroMgr exe For example if during the installation of Micro Manager you chose to install Micro Manager into the D Program Files ASHTECH MicroMgr directory then TRUMP would be installed into the same directory The automatic installation of Micro Manager does not put TRUMP into the Windows search path One can add TRUMP to the Windows search path by right clicking on My Computer selecting the Properties menu item selecting the Environment tab selecting the Path system variable and then editing the Value field to include the directory in which TRUMP is stored Additionally the automatic installation of Micro Manager puts a TRUMP icon neither onto the desktop nor in the Start Menu bar To create a program icon on the desktop simply find the program file TRUMP EXE using My Computer right click and
218. ites that fall below this elevation angle will not be recorded in the memory files nor will they be used in the receiver s position computations This parameter takes affect in the general recording of GPS data when Session Programming is not in use see Section 4 1 5 4 5 Min Num SVs Specifies the minimum number of satellites required to allow data recording That is when the number of tracked satellites falls below this value the data observed by the receiver will not be recorded in the memory files This parameter takes affect in the general recording of GPS data when Session Programming is not in use see Section 4 1 5 4 5 Record Data This parameter can be thought of as a master recording control When checked the receiver is permitted to record data and will use other factors such as Elevation Mask and the minimum number of satellites to determine what is recorded When unchecked the receiver is not permitted to record data regardless of other parameters Ring File Storage Mode When the receiver is in the Ring File Storage mode the receiver is designed to always make room for the most recent data by deleting older files When in this mode the receiver manages the files automatically i e deleting the oldest file when more room is needed to store recent data When the Ring File Storage Mode is not enabled the receiver will stop recording data once the receiver s memory becomes full For complete details on t
219. iting instructions in a predefined language that will accomplish the tasks you need 50 The following is a list of the mnemonics and their descriptions that were implemented within Micro Manager at the time this section was written Description SESC Single character session code as extracted from the name of the downloaded receiver file name RXSSC _ RINEX Session Code This will be a single character when 8 3 RINEX file naming format is selected and 3 characters when the 10 3 RINEX naming format is selected For the 10 3 form this session code will be equivalent to the hmm portion of the RINEX name described in Appendix A file name by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file Gpss Seconds of GPS Week of the start of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file GPWE GPS Week of the end of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file Seconds of GPS Week of the end of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file YS The last digit of the year of the start of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file YE The last digit of the year of the end of the dat
220. itor Appendix D describes the format of the exported Telephone Directory List 40 3 1 4 Configuring RINEX Site Header Tables Micro Manager can be configured to convert downloaded data files to RINEX see Section 4 1 5 1 Appendix E provides information about RINEX and the program XYZAshRx exe These sections i e Section 4 1 5 1 and Appendix E basically describe how to get Micro Manager to create RINEX files from data downloaded from the GPS receiver In this section we concentrate more on the concept of how to configure the various documentation information that will be contained in the RINEX files created by Micro Manager Furthermore we describe options for naming RINEX data files Before beginning however some background information is in order to help with the understanding as to why one needs to configure this RINEX Site Header Table At the top of each RINEX file is header data This header data is intended to be specific about each site from which the data are collected as well as information about each collection period However Micro Manager can be configured to connect with and download data from numerous different remote sites one at a time Therefore a single configuration of this RINEX header data is not sufficient Micro Manager maintains a table that is configured by the user and which is indexed by site name and contains the pertinent information needed by the RINEX converter for each site One gains acces
221. lank characters Ant Ht The entered Height of Antenna meters above the mark This field is not editable as it is derived from the other Antenna Height information available on the window That is it is derived using the following formula Ant Ht Vertical Offset sqrt Slant 2 Radius 2 A drawing of these measurements is provided at the end of this table Session A single character designating the session code It is recommended that you leave this unchanged as Micro Manager will automatically designate the sessions during download operations Revr S N Max 3 non blank characters Usually used to record the last 3 digits of the receiver serial number Ant S N Max 3 non blank characters Usually used to record the last 3 digits of the antenna serial number Month Day Month and Day Used only for documentation purposes Operator Max 3 non blank characters Usually the operator provides his her initials Code Maximum of 13 non blank characters Any 13 character code sequence you may desire to be recorded as part of the file information Slant The three components that are used to compute the Antenna Height that is Radius stored as part of the project information in the receiver see the Ant Ht Vertical parameter described earlier in this table Offset Azimuth These fields are placeholders for potential future efforts that may allow and reference coordinates to be offset from some kn
222. le copies of Micro Manager can be run on a single workstation without need of additional sentinel keys Prior to connecting to the GPS receiver Micro Manager needs to be configured to suit your data collections needs Please note that this configuration process is extremely important as the Micro Manager factory defaults will probably not meet your needs The Micro Manager configuration information is stored in 3 files 1 MICROMGR PNM 2 MICROMGR MDM and 3 MICROMGR INI All of these configuration files are located in the same directory where the main program file G e MICROMGR EXE is stored The file named MICROMGR PNM stores the telephone numbers to be dialed to reach each of your remote receivers The file named MICROMGR MDM stores all of the configuration information associated with each of the modems you have configured to be used with your PC Finally the file named MICROMGR INI contains all other configuration information related to the program Micro Manager automatically updates the contents of the configuration files as the operator makes changes using the configuration menus Changes are written to these files so that the configuration may be recalled at the start of the next run of the program In this way 293 once the desired configuration is set the operator no longer needs to change it unless of course it needs to be altered to support a new configuration The Configuration sub menus of the Micro Ma
223. mands This feature is particularly useful when you are testing your post download commands because you can disable the commands that are not directly part of your test The wait for complete indication is used to indicate whether or not Micro Manager will wait for the current command to complete before launching the next command in the set of post download commands Checking this checkbox allows you to specify the dependency of later commands upon the completion of the current command If there are no later dependencies upon the command you are editing uncheck the checkbox labeled Wait for this command to complete before issuing the next command However if you want to ensure that each command is launched only after the completion of the last command make sure that the wait for complete checkbox is checked on each command The lower half of this window displays any warnings detected by Micro Manager as a result of pressing the OK or Verify Buttons Again the verification that Micro Manager performs on the entered commands is limited The lack of a negative indication regarding a command does not imply that it is error free When Micro Manager detects an error it will attempt to show the location of the violation in the text box labeled Next Warning Position Within Command Line The location is indicated using 3 carat symbols i e 4 The rationale for the warning will be displayed in the text box labeled Reason for Warning
224. mary difference between these two configurations is the use of modems to establish the link between the Personal Computer and the GPS Receiver For details on connecting modems to your GPS receiver please consult the appropriate receiver manual Likewise the manuals of your Personal Computer should describe how to connect install modems To communicate with remotely located receivers you will need a minimum of two modems i e one for the computer and one for every remotely located GPS receiver Thales Navigation recommends that you utilize modems from the same manufacturer throughout your installation to avoid compatibility problems Furthermore Thales Navigation recommends that you use either US Robotic Courier or Sportster Modems Check with Thales Navigation regarding other modems including spread spectrum type radio modems It should be emphasized that Thales Navigation does not support all modems so it is necessary to verify that the modems you wish to use are supported Sf Se The particular type of receiver and for certain receiver types the communication port of the receiver used for Micro Manager functions plays a key role in the Micro Manager configuration process This is because there are slight hardware variations in the various uZ Family of GPS receivers With the exception of Port A of uZ CGRS receivers the DTR DSR hardware handshaking lines ARE NOT implemented It is essential to understand this because many modems are pre
225. me active only when you have configured a modem to operate with the receiver see Section 4 1 5 4 3 If you select a reset option and select the Have receiver send modem initialization string then when you press the OK button Micro Manager will send a command that causes the desired reset operation and then the receiver will send the modem initialization string to the receiver 4 1 5 3 Upload Firmware Micro Manager permits the upload of firmware to the uZ Family of receivers Thales Navigation has paid particular attention to providing reliable and stable firmware uploads That is Micro Manager contains a built in firmware uploading capability that utilizes a protective firmware upload protocol reliable firmware file formats and very stringent firmware crosscheck procedures The result is a reliable means of upgrading your receiver s firmware either through a direct connection or a remote connection Before continuing this description it is important to detail some restrictions and instructions that apply only to the iCGRS receiver For iCGRS receivers firmware loads are performed through receiver Ports C or D Regardless of which port you decide to use for a firmware load you are strongly encouraged to disable the networking facilities during the firmware loading process Once the new receiver firmware has been loaded and you have acknowledged the firmware replacement prompt in the affirmative Micro Manager will automatically termina
226. mentation we will call the former approach the Manual GUI approach and the latter will be called the Command Line approach Both the Manual GUI and the Command Line approaches rely upon configuration information contained in the INI file associated with the converter program This INI file is called TRUMP INI and is stored in the same directory as the main program Changes to this configuration file occur whenever the user changes configuration using the Manual GUI approach That is when desiring to use the Command Line mode you should pre set the configuration using the Manual GUI approach Section H 3 1 will describe the Manual GUI approach to using TRUMP and Section H 3 2 will describe the Command Line approach to using TRUMP Section H 3 3 contains information and cautionary notes on the relationship of TRUMP and Network facilities e g FTP Sites and Drive Mapping It is important to re state the fact that the configuration information is stored in the file TRUMP INI which is stored in the same directory as the program file i e TRUMP EXE It is strongly advised that no other program be editing this file while TRUMP is running Please note that only one instance of TRUMP can be running at one time and the following files must be found in the same directory as the TRUMP executable program XYZAshRx EXE XYZAshRx INI XYZAshRx BMP UPackU12 EXE UPackU12 INI UPackU12 BMP These files contain the additional two
227. message Depending upon the receiver configuration a D File may not be output through the conversion process Micro Manager has no way to verify this when the command is created If no D File is created during the conversion process the post download command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post download command The name of the D File converted from the downloaded receiver file does not include drive letter and pathname See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert downloaded receiver files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message Depending upon the receiver configuration a D File may not be output through the conversion process Micro Manager has no way to verify this when the command is created If no D File is created during the conversion process the post download command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post download command The name of the E File converted from the downloaded receiver file includes full path See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert downloaded receiver files to Ashtech formatted files HAS
228. message contains only time of day time tags and 2 the NMEA GXP message contains UTC time tags In this Section we address item 1 item 2 is addressed in Section E 3 1 2 3 Because the NMEA GXP message i e the message used to time tag the meteorological data contains only time of day we must resolve the start day of the data file It is for this reason that the Start Day of Data prompts are provide in the file selection window You can specify the start day either through GPS time or through a Gregorian time When you specify the GPS time you need only be accurate to the day in which the data starts If you specify a seconds of GPS week which falls within the day i e it does not specify a time that is on the exact start of the day the program will be able to resolve the actual start time of the file That is simply specify a time which falls within the correct day in which the start of the file belongs If the file contains data from multiple days of data the program will be able to resolve those day changes as well If the input NMA meteorological data file name is in the Ashtech file naming format the program will be able to resolve the start time of the data without your assistance but still giving you the chance to override the start time of the file Once you specify the name of the file the program will parse that name and determine if it fits the proper naming convention and if so it will fill in the fields with the s
229. mily of Ashtech GPS receivers Data are output in the Ashtech formatted processing data files The specific types of files output include 1 B Files i e raw observation files 2 E Files i e broadcast navigation message files 3 S File i e site files 4 C Files i e corrected position output file 5 Event Files 6 Almanac Files 7 Photo Files F 1 1 Minimum System Requirements UPackU 12 requires the target platform to be a Windows 95 98 ME NT or Windows 2000 based computer While UPackU12 requires less than 1 megabyte of memory to run Windows 95 98 ME NT and 2000 impose higher minimums You should consult the appropriate Microsoft documentation to determine the minimum system requirements for Windows 176 UPackU 12 requires less than 2 megabytes of disk space However UPackU12 creates output files from your receiver image files As a general rule the output files will require up to 3 5 times the space required by the image files The exact amount required depends highly upon the type of data stored in the receiver image files which dictates the type and content of the output files F 1 2 Demo Versions There are two basic configurations of UPackU 12 fully operational and demonstration versions This document applies to both configurations Demonstration versions which are freely distributed over the Internet or provided on diskette without accompanying sentinel keys will not be nearly as capable as the operati
230. mmunication configuration of the local computer through this window the settings may not be compatible with those of the receiver When Micro Manager is directly connected to a GPS receiver and Micro Manager knows that it is connected to a uZ Family GPS receiver as would be indicated by the lower right portion of the status bar see Section 4 1 1 4 any changes to the communication configuration will result in the issuance of the following prompt WARMIN Rereier Waa onnecbed E appesi hat you mere connected bo a reiser For the made selected comm configuration Soud you ls this program bo aubomahcaly configure any attached necerer accordingly Lie Jj This prompt is really indicating that you are changing the communications settings of your local computer port such that you may not be able to communicate with the receiver Furthermore the point of the prompt is to determine if you want to attempt to automatically set the communication configuration of the receiver to match that of your computer If you answer Yes Micro Manager will first set its local port configuration then go through a polling process to determine the receiver s type and communication parameters because you may have through this window selected a different local computer port and then command the receiver to desired communication speed Please be advised that the polling process used to detect the receiver s port speed may fail on some USB to
231. mponents of their system before allowing the post download commands to become part of operational environments 3 Users should fully check out their post download commands before allowing them in operational environments The checkout should include implementing the commands in the Micro Manager environment 4 Programs that access the communications port to which Micro Manager is connected must not be used 5 When the user manually terminates a file download or convert operation the post download commands for those downloaded files i e both those fully downloaded and those partially downloaded will NOT be launched 64 6 7 8 9 10 15 If there are any commands that have not completed from the perspective of Micro Manager at the manual termination of post session commands processing i e by pressing the Cancel button or terminating Micro Manager the currently running command s will continue That is the manual cancellation of Post Download Commands simply causes Micro Manager to stop issuing any new commands When a download or conversion operation is terminated due to a system failure such as a power failure Micro Manager will not launch the post download commands for the terminated download conversion operation When the post download commands for a download and convert operation are terminated due to a system failure such as a power failure Micro Manager will not restart those commands on th
232. n U file delete process several times 2 Completely reset the receiver s Internal and External memory see Section 4 1 5 2 This will cause the receiver s memory card to be reformatted If after you have performed the above procedure the Receiver Files window still displays the warning message it is possible that your receiver s memory card has begun to degrade This is because the above procedure should completely remove the non U files from the receiver s memory leaving only bad blocks as the cause of the warning message At this point you have the option to raise the criterion used to display the warning message The rationale for changing the criterion is simply to remove the warning message from the display and should the card begin to degrade further the message will be redisplayed based upon the new criterion Use the procedure that follows to change the criterion controlling the display of the warning message 1 Position the mouse pointer over the above warning message and right click Upon doing so Micro Manager will display a pop up menu with the single menu entry entitled Edit Memory Warning Size Upon selecting that menu entry the following edit window will be displayed Edit Unavailable Memory Warning Size Eg Enter the amount of unavailable memory in KBytes needed for warning message display The unavailable memory includes non U Files and bad sectors 300 2 Increase the value of the Unu
233. n executable program i e SETUP EXE that is used to control the installation To start the installation process one simply launches that executable The table that follows provides information related to the three typical installer forms 20 CD ROM The top level directory of the CD ROM contains three items 1 a file named Install txt 2 a MicroMegr folder and 3 a Remote32 folder The file Install txt describes how one installs various programs from that CR ROM however we will describe herein how one installs the Micro Manager program The MicroMgr and Remote32 folders contain the files and folders needed to install Micro Manager and Remote32 respectively Please note those that have purchased Micro Manager Pro can install and run Remote32 i e if you did not purchase the Pro version you can install Remote32 but it will fail to run Within the CD ROM MicroMgr folder are a set of folders e g Disk1 Disk2 Disk3 etc Simply browse using Explorer or a like approach into the MicroMgr Disk1 folder and double click the program SETUP EXE Diskette To install Micro Manager onto your computer insert the Micro Manager installation diskette labeled Micro Manager Install Disk 1 into the A or B drive of your computer Press the Start button and select Run Use the Browse command to locate and run the Setup p
234. n sent or received then this field will contain None Received Station ID The RTCM Base Station ID contained in the Type 9 message Z Count The RTCM message Z Count ZCNT of the Type 9 message The RTCM Z Count is the time tag of the message and is displayed as seconds of the hour GPS time frame Ref Health The health flag being reported in the Type 9 message Seq The RTCM Sequence Number SQNU attached to the RTCM Type 9 message 96 Field Description SVPRN The SVPRN row displays the GPS satellite numbers for which there are RTCM correctors in the Type 9 message PRC The Pseudo Range Correctors meters for each satellite contained in the Type 9 message RRC The Range Rate Correctors meters second for each satellite contained in the Type 9 message IODE The Issue of Data Ephemeris for each satellite corrector contained in the Type 9 message UDRE The User Differential Range Error for each satellite corrector contained in the Type 9 message 4 1 4 6 6 RTCM Type 15 Display RTCM Type 15 messages communicate Ionosphere and Troposphere parameters However the uZ Family receivers do not currently report this message to Micro Manager As such this section simply maintains a placeholder for future developments The screen capture that follows shows an example display generated by Micro Manager to report RTCM Type 15 messages The display shows the last RTCM Ty
235. n you will want to set this parameter to the maximum amount of time required for the full round trip of messages through the network Micro Manager permits three non response failures for each command before reporting an error Thus if you tend to get a high number of errors during data transmission particularly during a file download operation then you will want to increase the turn around time On the other hand increasing the number to an overly large value will cause Micro Manager to take a long time to report errors For example if you set the parameter to 10000 or ten seconds then when there are truly errors in data transmission it will take up to 30 seconds to start reporting the errors The second and third parameters define the modem string character representing the delay and the duration of that delay Section 3 1 2 describes how these two parameters are used The fourth parameter i e Force receiver s link speed to connect speed should only be used when employing older modems where the PC to modem modem to modem and modem to receiver link speeds should all be the same See Section 3 1 2 7 for more information on this subject The final parameter of this section deals with dead time That is one can easily forget to log off a remote system When these connections are long distance expensive telephone bills can result The Idle minutes before hang up specifies how long in minutes there can be no activity b
236. nager program are used to set the majority of these parameters Details of the contents of the Configuration sub menus will be provided in later sections of this document The above mentioned configuration files are text i e ASCID files As such the configuration can also be modified with any text file editor However you are strongly discouraged from making configuration changes using this approach In fact after you get Micro Manager configured as desired it would be prudent to make a backup copy of these configuration files Should you need to modify any of these files with a text editor please verify that you have a backup copy before editing them 3 1 Configuration Menus Most Micro Manager parameters are set through the main menu Configuration option The Configuration drop down menu is divided into 6 different selections These 6 selections become available when Configuration is selected a drop down menu appears File View Receiver Configuration Help 1 A 1 0 A fE RINEX Site Header Tables 3 am ties ga Edit Post Download Commands A ISR AN enue Sq Miscellaneous The following Sub Sections describe each of the 6 configuration windows 1 e sub menus It is intended that Micro Manager be configured before connecting to a receiver One can however change the configuration of the receiver while Micro Manager is connected to that receiver Special features have been built into Micro Manager
237. nd line is used for automatic FTP processing where one or more copies of XYZs_FTP can be running simultaneously as described earlier in this section For example multiple copies of The Thales Navigation GBSS program can launch post session commands simultaneously each of which can contain calls that launch separate copies of this program simultaneously To prevent the race condition the Q enables the master slave relationship described above Please note that it is intended that this command line parameter be used in conjunction with C or U command line parameters T targetpath This command line option is used for automatic FTP uploads where it is desired to specify the target path on the host FTP system The parameter targetpath specifies the desired FTP system target path Please note that it is intended that this parameter be used in conjunction with the H and U parameters 202 U fullpathname This command line parameter specifies the full path and name of the local computer file to be uploaded to the remote FTP host site Please note that it is intended that this parameter be used in conjunction with the H command line parameter Example 1 XYZs_FTP exe H X YZs FTP Site U D Test TestFile BIN In this example the program is instructed to establish a connection with the configured FTP host named XYZs FTP Site and upload the file D Test TestFile BIN into the FTP target directory set during the last GUI run o
238. nd receipt of a response to that command Micro Manager permits 3 non response failures for each command before reporting an error Thus if you tend to get a high number of errors during normal operations with a GPS receiver particularly during a file download operation then you will want 29 to increase the turn around time On the other hand increasing the number to an overly large value will cause Micro Manager to take a long time to report errors For example if you set the parameter to 9000 or nine seconds then when there are truly errors in data communications it will take up to 27 seconds to start reporting the errors In most cases you will not need to modify this parameter 3 1 2 Modem Settings The Modem Configuration window allows the operator to configure a single or a set of modems used by Micro Manager By selecting the Configuration Modem Settings menu option you will be presented with the following window E4 P Monier B a a ea fu Bragg sinners faa PA 1 2 ee i oe oe ioe AP ee tie i eer de Ce perees wel eee es ore Eri aiibi aa lii baim mfiri im iiilr m pP T Through this window you can perform the following tasks 1 Add Delete and Rename instances of modems 2 Edit the modem initialization strings for each modem 3 Edit the modem dialing and hang up parameters for each modem 4 Edit the expected modem command responses and 5 Edit specialized control features used d
239. nded mode This is accomplished through the command line mode Micro Manager enters the command line mode when the program is launched with command line parameters These parameters follow a strict pattern Failure to comply with the requirements will cause Micro Manager to reject the commands and terminate Micro Manager will also terminate the command line mode when the estimated amount of disk space required for download operations exceeds or nearly exceeds the amount of available disk space for the disk drive specified in the output file directory see Section 3 1 6 3 The values calculated for the required disk space are only estimated because of the following A The Log File may have data written to it that Micro Manager cannot predict B When a file is created on the target disk the amount of space Windows uses for that file on disk differs from disk type to disk type and C There is not a direct means of calculating the disk space required by the ring buffer file so a worst case scenario is estimated When the command line mode terminates the download operation prematurely and you have configured i e enabled the output Log File see Section 3 1 6 2 Micro Manager will attempt to output a termination rationale in the Log File Clearly Micro Manager will not be able to make this notation in the Log File if the disk containing it is full 148 2 It is also important to note that when in
240. nection and or the operation in progress Area In the upper right hand corner of the window is an XYZs of GPS logo The color of this logo is used to provide normal alert level status information What follows provides a description of each state This state indicates that XYZs_FTP is operating normally and GPs without any reported alert or warning conditions The satellite icon X22 ef above the lettering will be moving continuously 3 The letters of the icon toggle between yellow and blue This state ODS indicates a warning condition and is accompanied by a window Kiat which explains the warning The letters of the icon toggle between red and blue This state GRS indicates an alert condition and is accompanied by a window which explains the alert 191 There are two levels of error conditions reported through this program 1 Warnings and 2 Alerts Warnings i e the yellow flashing icons are used to designate conditions that require your attention but are not potentially fatal to proper execution of the program Alerts i e the red flashing icons on the other hand are used to designate conditions that may arise that have a potentially adverse effect on the continued operation of the program and you are advised to immediately terminate the program upon receiving such an alert During command line mode see Section G 3 2 XYZs_FTP will terminate the program when these Alert i e but not Warning conditions arise
241. nerated are based upon the start times of the files When unchecked the file names are based upon the end times of the files The file naming approach is described in Appendix A Type The format of the data being collected These are often referred to as Ranger Modes Please consult your Receiver Operations Manual for the meanings of the values displayed Start Time Describes the start time of the file in the following format DDD HH MM SS Where DDD isthe day of the year HH is the hour of the data MM is the minutes of the hour and SS is the seconds of the minute All times and days are based upon GPS time End Time Describes the end time of the file in the following format DDD HH MM SS Where DDD isthe day of the year HH is the hour of the data MM is the minutes of the hour and SS is the seconds of the minute All times and days are based upon GPS time When a file is currently open for collecting more data the receiver reports the file to be ACTIVE Bytes Provides the number of bytes in receiver memory currently being used by the file Note that this field describes the number of bytes required by the receiver s compressed internal storage format i e it does not reflect the number of bytes required to store the file in B E and S File formats which are less efficient Upon selecting a file thereby changing its Sel status to Yes Micro Manager
242. ngs providing the entry ID and telephone number will initially be blank 3 1 3 5 Deleting a Telephone Directory Entry To delete an existing telephone directory list entry simply select the desired entry and press the Delete Button Micro Manager does not confirm your desire to delete the entry If you have erroneously selected the Delete button simply press the Cancel button of the Telephone Directory window thereby causing Micro Manager to discard all changes to the telephone directory 3 1 3 6 Importing a Telephone Directory List You can import a previously exported telephone directory list by simply pressing the Import button of the Telephone Directory window Upon doing so you will be provided with a dialog box requesting the name of the file to be imported After selecting the file you will be ask whether or not you want to replace your existing telephone directory with that which you are importing or whether you wish to append to your current list 3 1 3 7 Exporting the Current Telephone Directory List You can export your entire telephone directory by simply pressing the Export button of the Telephone Directory window Upon doing so you will be provided with a dialog box requesting the name of the export file to be created Micro Manager will create the export file after clicking the OK button The file created through this operation is an ASCII file which can be edited using any normal ASCII file text ed
243. nicate uncorrected carrier phase measurements typically used in Real Time Kinematic applications The screen capture that follows shows an example display generated by Micro Manager to report RTCM Type 18 messages The display shows the last RTCM Type 18 message sent Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 6 Type 9 Type 15 Type 16 Type 18 type 19 Type 20 Type 21 Ty gt 18 12 28 00 age 00 00 06 52 Time Of Message Station ID jz Z Count 759 6 Ref Health po Seq it fp Carrier 5 L1 F CA 3 0 587575 617 5 L2 F P 3 0 482272 703 11 L1 F cA 3 o 1219760 664 11 L2 F P 3 0 7466706 645 Py L1 F cA 3 o 4312941 797 21 L2 F P 3 0 1048926 887 25 L1 F cA 3 o 2981896 988 25 L2 F P 3 0 2275523 359 29 L1 F cA 3 o 5313191 570 29 L2 F P 3 0 2240148 387 xi The following table contains a description of each parameter displayed in the RTCM Type 18 message display Field Description Time Of The GPS time expressed as time of GPS day at which the Type 18 Message message was sent for Base station or received for Rover stations If the message is over a second old then the time will also contain an age display If such a message has not been sent or received then this field will contain None Received Station ID__ The RTCM Base Station ID contained in the Type 18 message Z Count The RTCM message Z Count ZCNT of the Type 18 message The RTCM Z Count is the time tag of the message and is displayed as se
244. nitialization String Its purpose is to allow you to send another initialization string because some modems actually need two initialization strings Like that of the Initialization String the receiver will attach the proper end of line sequence required by the modem Data Escape This is the sequence of characters the receiver will transmit to cause the modem to transition from the data transmission mode to the command mode If these terms are not familiar to you then you should consult your modem manuals for details Command Escape This is the sequence of characters the receiver will send to the modem to cause it to transition from the command mode to data transmission mode If these terms are not familiar to you then you should consult your modem manuals for details We have stated elsewhere in this manual that there are slight hardware differences between members of the uZ Family of receivers That is with the exception of Port A of uZ CGRS receivers the DTR DSR hardware handshaking lines ARE NOT implemented Most modems employ these lines as a signal to DROP the link that is when DTR drops the modem will hang up the telephone connection Therefore unless you connect the modem to Port A of a uZ CGRS receiver you should configure your modem not to use the DTR signal modems that support the Hayes compatible command structure use the amp D0 setting to disable the use of the DTR signal The final pa
245. oach allows programs to invoke some of the features of this program without the need of human intervention Throughout the remainder of this documentation we will call the former approach the Manual GUI approach and the latter will be called the Command Line approach Both the Manual GUI and the Command Line approaches rely upon configuration information contained in the INI file associated with this program This INI file is called X YZs_FTP INI and resides in the same directory as the main program Changes to this configuration file occur whenever the user changes configuration using the Manual GUI approach In fact when desiring to use the Command Line mode one should pre set the configuration using the Manual GUI approach Section G 3 1 will describe the Manual GUI approach to using XYZs_FTP and Section G 3 2 will describe the Command Line approach to using XYZs_FTP It is important to re state the fact that the configuration information is stored in the file X YZs_FTP INI which is stored in the same directory as the program file i e XYZs_FTP EXE When you require an alternative configuration for example to support two 188 simultaneously operating Micro Manager programs you should copy the following files to another directory XYZs_FTP INI XYZs_FTP EXE XYZs_FTP BMP By doing this you create an independent copy of the INI file Launching the program XYZs_FTP EXE from this new directory causes the program to
246. oad Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert downloaded receiver files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message The name of the S File converted from the downloaded receiver file does not include drive letter and pathname See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert downloaded receiver files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message The name of the Almanac File converted from the downloaded receiver file includes full path See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert downloaded receiver files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message Depending upon the receiver configuration an Almanac File may not be output through the conversion process Micro Manager has no way to verify this when the command is created If no Almanac File is created during the conversion process the post download command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post download command 55 Description The name of the Almanac File converted from the downloaded receiver file does not in
247. of RINEX Configuration Window 0 0 ccc seecesererereneneeeeeeeeeeeres 44 3 1 4 4 1 RINEX Observation File Positional Data 0 ccccceccecceccescesscssscssecssecseesssessseees 45 3 1 4 4 2 RINEX Observation File Header Data 0 0 cc ceccceccesccesccsscesscesscssecssecseecseesseees 45 3 1 4 4 3 RINEX Observation File Header Data 0 ccccccccecceccescesscesscssecssecssecssessesseeees 46 3 1 4 5 Meteorological Tab of RINEX Configuration Window 0 ccsceeeserereneneeeeeeeeeeeeees 47 3 1 5 Editing Post Download Commands sscssssccsssscsssscssssccsscssssscsssesssssscssssesssesessseses 49 3 1 5 1 Post Download Commands Window c cccccccecccssesssesseessesssesseesscesscesscssecssecsseceeesseees 57 3 1 5 2 Post Download Command Line Editor Window 0 ccccccceccccesecsssesssessesssesssesseesseees 60 3 1 5 3 Micro Manager and Post Download Commands ccccccecescseseseseeeeeeseseseseseseeeeseees 64 3 1 5 4 Post Download Command Line Examples cccesesssessseseseeeeeeeeeeeesenenenenseeesenenenes 65 3 1 5 4 1 Moving Data Files to a Date Based Directory cece eeseeeeeeeeeesereseneneeeeenenees 66 3 1 6 Miscellaneous Configuration Items sscssssccssssssssscssssscsscsssssssssssscsssssssssssssssens 68 3 1 6 1 Configuring Alert SOUNS ccccccccecesesseseseseseseseeseecseeceaescsececaeeceaeseseeecseseeaeeceeeeeseeeeneees 69 3 1 6 2 Configuring Output Diagnostic Messages cccececseseseseeseseseeeec
248. of firmware uploads affect the Receiver Files window Specifically when a firmware upload takes place part of the receiver s memory is used as a staging area for the upload To ensure separation between GPS data files and firmware files the firmware files are stored differently from normal GPS data files these non GPS data files are called non U files If the firmware upload terminates prematurely e g a user cancels the operation or you have forgotten to erase an uploaded firmware file that firmware file will remain in the receiver s memory and will occupy space Because of the separation between GPS data files and firmware files the receiver does not report these non U Files in its directory listing As we said earlier the uZ Family of receivers treats the memory in a manner similar to the way your computer handles hard disks When you request a directory listing of the files on your computer the computer does not normally respond with the number of bad sectors flagged on its hard disk Like that of your computer the uZ Family of receivers does not report these bad sectors in their directory listings Furthermore like that of your computer s hard disk some amount of bad sectors is normal Also like that of your computer s hard disk the receiver s memory can degrade over time and extended use Memory card degradation is rare and normally occurs from extreme age extreme use and or extended operation of the receiver outside o
249. of the M sequence In case 2 Micro Manager sends the string ATDT 9 18005551212 and then sends a carriage return character in place of the M sequence The difference may not be obvious but it is important For example most modems do not process many commands until the receipt of the carriage return The dialing command i e ATDT is one such command Therefore in case 1 the modem would end up dialing 918005551212 immediately after receiving the carriage return i e the symbol has no effect other than to increase the amount time to send the string In case 2 the modem dials 9 waits 3 times the delay for the comma character see your modem manual for details and then dials the remaining characters The latter case shows how one uses the dialing sequence first to obtain an outside line and then to dial the desired telephone number Finally you will need to consult the manual for your modem to determine the how to and the strings required for configuring your modem You can use the Terminal Window of Micro Manager to test your modem strings see Section 4 1 6 sai 3 1 2 1 Selecting an Existing Modem When you leave the Modem Configuration window using the OK button the modem currently selected for use by the program will be shown as the selected entry in the drop down list of modems in the window box entitled Select Modem Type To choose a different modem simply select that modem from the dro
250. of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File YYS The last two digits of the year of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File YYE The last two digits of the year of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File yyyYs The 4 digit year of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File YYYYE The 4 digit year of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File RXYY The last two digits of the year of the start of the data used in naming any RINEX files MMS The 2 digit month of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File MME The 2 digit month of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File MMMS _ The 3 character month name of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File MMME _ The 3 character month name of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File DDS The 2 digit day of the month of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File DDE The 2 digit day of the month of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File DDDS The 3 digit day of the year of the start of the data fo
251. of these subsections we will refer to the messages as being sent by the RTCM base station even though the contents of the message could have been received by the participating RTCM remote station We do this only in the interest of reducing the redundancy in 9 this document Therefore unless otherwise noted we will be referring to both messages sent and received by the RTCM base and RTCM remote stations respectively Additionally this document was written when Version 2 2 of the RTCM standard was in effect and implemented by the receiver firmware Should your receiver not implement this standard then the descriptions that follow may or may not be applicable For complete details on the RTCM standard please contact Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services 655 Fifteenth Street NW Suite 300 Washington D C 20005 USA 4 1 4 6 1 RTCM Type 1 Display RTCM Type 1 messages communicate Differential GPS Corrections The screen capture that follows shows an example display generated by Micro Manager to report RTCM Type 1 messages The display shows the last RTCM Type 1 message sent Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 6 Type 3 Type 15 Type 16 Type 18 Type 19 Type 20 Type 21 Ty gt Time Of Message 16 29 52 00 age 00 00 06 20 Station ID fz Z Count fisoa 2 Ref Health po Seq fi SVPRH 23 21 15 29 pre AWB 470 422 486 RRC 0 000 0 002 Boa 0 000 IODE 172 17 84 K UDRE 0 0
252. of those files Micro Manager then attempts to delete files from the receiver s memory that have been closed more than 12 hours before the current receiver time Example 2 MicroMgr exe g 6 0 d 12 0 In this example Micro Manager has been instructed to establish a direct connection with a receiver It then obtains files that have been closed less than 6 hours prior to the current receiver time Upon successful download of those files Micro Manager then attempts to delete files from the receiver s memory that have been closed more than 12 hours before the current receiver time Example 3 MicroMgr exe c 2 u E scripts Met txr Here Micro Manager has been instructed to establish a remote modem connection using telephone list entry number 2 After establishing the connection it will perform an upload of the script file at E scripts Met txt 150 Appendix A File Naming Approach Almost every Ashtech file is named based upon some value of GPS time Micro Manager will create the receiver sourced data file names based upon times stored for those files in the receiver Status files such as the logging summary or Log File are created based upon the CPU clock time This is because these files are opened and closed independently of the receiver data files For example the Log File contains information about the entire remote session not to be confused with a data collection session During that session you may download files fr
253. ogical option of the RINEX converter is not available unless the presence of a software sentinel key coded for Micro Manager Professional or the GBSS Ashtech s Geodetic Base Station software Meteorological module can be found To convert collected meteorological data to RINEX using the manual approach simply launch the program XYZAshRx with no command line options On doing so you will be provided with the main program screen Using the main menu of the program select the Convert menu option and then select the Met to RINEX sub menu option IMG AY Zs CF SPs ine Selecting this sub menu option will provide you with a screen that looks similar to the following 168 RINEX Meteorological File Selection x Source Meteorological Data File D source Ash_RINX test A99005 nma Browse Start Day of Data GPS Week 991 Seconds of Week fi72800 Year fis99 Month ho Day b Leap Seconds UTC To GPS js Target RINEX File D source Ash_RINX test AAAA0051 99M Browse X Cancel XYZ s of GPS The primary components of this screen are 1 The source meteorological data file name 2 Start day of the source meteorological data file 3 Leap seconds for converting UTC to GPS times 4 The target RINEX meteorological data file name Upon completing the edits press the OK button to enter edit the header data related to the output RINEX meteorological data see Se
254. om numerous days The Log File will record all of the activities that occurred during that remote session including an entry for each file downloaded It is also important to note that when in command line mode Micro Manager makes no attempt to protect files already stored on disk If Micro Manager generates a name for a file that is already stored on disk the Micro Manager will overwrite that file when the named file is downloaded and provide no preventative screen messages When in its GUI or manual mode you will be warned of potential file overwrites A 1 U File File Naming Approach The uZ CGRS receiver generates the names of the U Files that Micro Manager writes to disk When Micro Manager obtains a directory listing of the files stored in the receiver see Section 4 1 5 1 the names of the files are communicated to Micro Manager as part of that directory information These files names are generated by the receiver according to a convention which is described in the UZ CGRS receiver manuals please see those manuals for details The naming convention follows the general form described below tnnnnsyy ddd where t represents the file type U for a uZ Family receiver image file nnon represents the 4 character station name S represents the session code yy represents the last two digits of the year and ddd represents the day of the year For example a file named UASHTD99 005 is an Ashtech U File uZ Family receiver imag
255. ommand Indicates whether or not there are any detected warnings in the post download command Note whenever a command is enabled and a warning exists the post download commands will not be permitted to launch The text of the post download command in mnemonic form 58 The following describes the functionality of each button of this window OK E Edit Delete Import Export Cancel CHEE Accepts changes made to the post download commands including any imported commands Begins the editing of a highlighted post download command Simply use the mouse cursor to select the command to be edited and then press this button You can also begin editing a command by double clicking on the desired command The actual editing of a command takes place using the Post Download Command Line Editor window described in Section 3 1 5 2 Copies the highlighted post download command to the end of the set of commands and begins editing that command by launching the Post Download Command Line Editor window described in Section 3 1 5 2 Up to 100 post download commands are supported by Micro Manager Creates a new command at the end of the list of post download commands After creating the new command you immediately begin editing the new command using the Post Download Command Line Editor window described in Section 3 1 5 2 Up to 100 post download commands are supported by Micro Manager Deletes the highlighte
256. omputer Also within this area are context sensitive buttons that become enabled or disabled depending upon the current state of the program For example when the lightning button i e the button with the lightning bolt icon is enabled one can press that button to cause the highlighted file to be transferred to the FTP host When the button is disabled the FTP transfer of files from the local computer to the FTP host is not permitted e g you have not yet established a connection to the FTP host These buttons are described in more detail in Section G 3 1 2 1 FTP Host Within this section are information related to FTP host system and GUI Area elements that allow one to interact with the FTP host computer system The top pane of this area shows the current directory on the FTP Host system The pane below that shows a directory listing of the current directory of the FTP Host system At the bottom area of this window are a set of context sensitive buttons that become enabled or disabled depending upon the current state of the program For example the button with the red up arrow folder is used to move up one directory level on the FTP Host system When this button shows its icon in color the button is enabled When the button is disabled it is displayed in faint gray These buttons are described in more detail in Section G 3 1 2 2 Status The status information area is used to display diagnostic status information Information about the con
257. omputer installation issues as they relate to the operation of the Micro Manager software package Again in this section we describe the installation as it relates to Micro Manager Please note however that the utility programs supplied with Micro Manager include TRUMP which has primarily been designed to be used in conjunction with iCGRS receivers The iCGRS receivers have been designed to allow one to push via FTP receiver U Files to FTP sites TRUMP is described in Appendix H and unless otherwise noted e g Appendix H this manual does not pertain to the iCGRS receiver As such this section does not describe the configuration of the iCGRS receiver network configuration hardware or software Section 4 1 5 4 2 of this manual does describe a feature of Micro Manager that assists in the network configuration of an iCGRS receiver 2 1 Hardware Installation Micro Manager has been designed with two primary configurations in mind 1 direct connections and 2 remote connections Figures 2 1 A and 2 1 B provide basic block diagrams for these configurations Figure 2 1 A provides a direct connection also called a local receiver connection block diagram while Figure 2 1 B provides a remote receiver connection block diagram ah Personal Receiver Computer Figure 2 1 A Direct Connection GPS Receiver Personal Computer Figure 2 1 B Remote Connection As can be seen in the above block diagrams the pri
258. on to XYZAshRx XYZAshRx EXE written by The XYZ s of GPS Inc was designed to convert Ashtech raw GPS observation files to the Receiver INdependent EXchange format RINEX The program has been designed to operate on a Windows 95 or NT platform To facilitate a wide variety of users XYZAshRx can be configured and run through normal Windows Graphical User Interfaces GUD or launched directly from the command line That is a user can use the conversion program just like most other Windows programs or the converter program can be executed without need of human intervention from other programs such as Ashtech s Micro Manager Software from a DOS command line or from batch files XYZAshRx currently supports the Ashtech GPS and GPS GLONASS receivers Data are output in the RINEX Version 2 0 format The specification for this version of RINEX came from Dr Werner Gurtner s paper RINEX The Receiver Independent Exchange Format Version 2 Revised in July of 1998 This document includes discussions pertaining to the Geodetic Base Station Software GBSS and the GBSS Meteorological Module This is because this XYZAshRx is also used with those programs We have included discussions pertaining to the features of XYZAshRx specific to those programs for completeness Please be advised that the some of the documentation may not be applicable under Micro Manager However whenever Micro Manager using UpackU12 EXE creates an Ashtech D File that c
259. onal versions For example demonstration versions will not allow the output of any data This document will not seek to delineate the specific differences between the demonstration and the operational versions It is important to note however that the installation instructions documented herein apply to both configurations F 2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW UPackU12 is currently distributed as part of Micro Manager The program will be installed in the same directory as that of MicroMgr exe For example if during the installation of Micro Manager you chose to install Micro Manager into the D Program Files ASHTECH MicroMegr directory then UPackU12 would be installed into the same directory The automatic installation of Micro Manager does not put UPackU 12 into the Windows search path One can add UPackU12 to the Windows search path by right clicking on My Computer selecting the Properties menu item selecting the Environment tab selecting the Path system variable and then editing the Value field to include the directory in which UPackU12 is stored Additionally the automatic installation of Micro Manager neither puts an icon onto the desktop nor in the Start Menu bar To create a program icon on the desktop simply find the program file UPackU12 EXE using My Computer right click and drag the icon to the desktop and select Create Shortcut Here For details on how to add a program to the Start Menu
260. ond example a reference position has not been set in the receiver The ECEF Position and Time window is divided into three parts 1 The current GPS and GMT time reported by the receiver 2 the current point position computed by the receiver and 3 the reference station position The upper area of the window contains the GPS and GMT time reported by the receiver The middle portion contains information obtained from the most recent point position solution reported by the receiver The lower portion of the window contains the reference position information configured for the receiver see Section 4 1 5 4 4 When no reference station position information has been stored by the receiver all components of the lower portion of the window will be displayed as none i e no fixed position entered As with all other windows in the program Micro Manager will show the units of a displayed field if you rest the cursor over that field for a couple of seconds Also please see the Section 4 1 4 note on how Micro Manager queries data for this window from the receiver 84 4 1 4 4 Geodetic Position and Time Window Like the Earth Centered Earth Fixed ECEF Position and Time window the Geodetic Position and Time window displays the following information 1 The current GPS time as reported by the receiver 2 The current GMT time reported by the receiver 3 Information on the current position computed by the receiver and 4 Information on t
261. onfiguring the Program ssssscssssscsssscssssssssscsssssssssssssessssssssssscssssssessesssssess 192 G 3 1 1 1 Configuration FTP Host Sites 2 eesesessssesececesesesessseecececseeeeeseseseseceseeneneneneeeeeees 193 G 3 1 1 2 Configuration Options occ csecceceseseeteneesesesesssesssesessecscecseseseseseseseceenenensuteseeeeseees 195 G 3 1 1 2 1 Configuring Auto Options 0 escseesesesesssesesesesessscscseseeesesececeseeseneneneeeeeeeanes 195 G 3 1 1 2 2 Configuring SOunS ce eeceseseeneneesesecesesssssesescscscsceeeseseseeecesseneneneeseeaeeees 196 G3 1 1 2 3 Configuring Log Pile s nichasiiiadianediiateianeviaewausdinaiaseindes 197 G 3 1 2 Performing FTP Functions ccccsssccssssccsssccsssscsssscccssccsssssssssessssscssssssessescsssses 198 G 3 1 2 1 Local Computer Area Window Element ceeeseseeceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneneneeeeeeees 199 G 3 1 2 2 FTP Host Area Window Elemento ceesesesecsssssssesesececeeeeesesecececeeseneneneneeeetees 200 G 3 2 Command Line Approach cccsccccccscsssesersscssssvsrssscsssssscsssssssseeaesssssesssees 201 APPENDIX H Thales Resident U File unpacking Manager Program TRUMP A Micro Manager Utility u ccccecssssssscsssssssssssssssssensssssssssessssssseees 204 H 1 Thales Resident U File unpacking Manager Program TRUMP 204 H 1 1 Minimum System Requirements sssssssscscnsssscsscnsssncenseneeees 204 H 2 INSTALLATION OVER VIEW s ssscssssossssossssssssesssecsssssseassecsescsesesoss
262. ontains meteorological data then XYZAshRx will automatically create a RINEX meteorological data file from that D File E 1 1 Minimum System Requirements XYZAshRx requires the target platform to be a Windows 95 or Windows NT based computer While XYZAshRx requires less than 1 megabyte of memory to run Windows 95 and NT impose higher minimums You should consult the appropriate Microsoft documentation to determine the minimum system requirements for Windows XYZAshRx requires less than 2 megabytes of disk space However XYZAshRx creates ASCII output files from your Raw Ashtech Observation files As a general rule ASCII RINEX files require approximately 1 5 times the space required by Raw Ashtech Observation Files 159 E 1 2 Demo Versions There are two basic configurations of XYZAshRx fully operational and demonstration versions This document applies to both configurations Demonstration versions which are freely distributed over the Internet or provided on diskette without accompanying sentinel keys are not nearly as capable as the operational versions For example demonstration versions will only create RINEX output files of 100 epochs or fewer This document will not seek to delineate the specific differences between the demonstration and the operational versions It is important to note however that the installation instructions documented herein apply to both configurations E 2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW XYZAshRx is currently
263. onverted from the receiver U File does not include drive letter and pathname The name of the S File converted from the receiver U File includes full path The name of the S File converted from the receiver U File does not include drive letter and pathname 219 Description The name of the Almanac File converted from the receiver U File includes full path Notes 1 Depending upon the receiver configuration an Almanac File may not be output through the conversion process TRUMP has no way to verify this when the command is created If no Almanac File is created during the conversion process the post convert command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post convert command The name of the Almanac File converted from the receiver U File does not include drive letter and pathname Notes 1 Depending upon the receiver configuration an Almanac File may not be output through the conversion process TRUMP has no way to verify this when the command is created If no Almanac File is created during the conversion process the post convert command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post convert command The name of the RINEX Observation Data file created from the converted Ashtech data files includes full path Notes 1 Whenever the option
264. ost directory listing pane of the window This button is used to download the currently selected FTP host system file in the FTP F host directory listing pane of the window Like the other buttons of this area this assumes that the account privileges grant this capability This button is used to request that the FTP host system delete the currently selected FTP K host system file in the FTP host directory listing pane of the window Like the other buttons of this area this assumes that the account privileges grant this capability G 3 2 Command Line Approach The Command Line approach to running XYZs_FTP is invoked by calling the program with the command line parameters listed in this section The Command Line approach permits automatic FTP operations on a named Host FTP site without human intervention In this way programs or batch files can automatically perform FTP functions such as uploading result files to an FTP server In Section G 3 1 1 2 1 FTP Auto Options are described The parameters detailed in that section govern some of the behavior of XYZs_FTP when invoked using the command line approach But before continuing we need to describe two primary modes of the command line approach Often multiple programs and batch files in an unattended system will need to FTP files to an FTP host system This presents a dilemma for XYZs_FTP For example suppose two copies of XYZs_FTP are launched by different programs vi
265. ou can enter the command you wish to send to the receiver or you can use the drop down list to select a message template If you select a message template you may need to edit it before sending the command to the receiver For example the template for the RCI command is PASHS RCLxxx xx In this case you will need to edit the xxx xx part of the command to contain a valid epoch interval before sending the command Entered commands are sent using the command Send Button To determine valid commands you must consult the appropriate receiver manual You do not need to supply the lt CR gt lt LF gt i e carriage return line feed sequences required at the end of the 145 messages Micro Manager will add those for you If you have the Add checksum to PASH commands checked then Micro Manager will automatically add the checksums to PASHS commands sent by pressing the Send button Another example is the template for enabling and disabling the tracking and use of selected satellites The general template is PASHS USE d x In this case you should replace the d with the two digit satellite pseudo random number For example satellite 8 should be entered as 08 i e the zero character and the eight character The x should be replaced with Y or N depending upon whether you want to enable or disable the use of the satellite respectively Right clicking in the Command Text area will
266. ough to accommodate the selected files The values calculated for the required disk space are merely estimated because of the following A The Log File may have data written to it which Micro Manager cannot predict and B When a file is created on the target disk the amount of space used by Windows for that file on disk differs from disk type to disk type As such the amount of space required can only be estimated and you are warned when it appears that the disk may become too full During the download operation you will be provided with a display which reports the download progress This window shown below describes the progress of a single download operation that has more than one download file selected 114 ZModen File Transfer x File Progress Total Progress Receiving U__D00 273 File Bytes Transferred 80870 21504 File Humber 2of2 Transfer Corrections 0 Raw Byte Count 22982 Raw Byte Rate 2186 Data Byte Count 72588 Data Byte Rate 6903 File Time Remaining 0 00 08 Total Time Remaining 0 00 08 Status Receiving Data 8 111 The fields of the download window are described in the table that follows Field Description File Progress Bar The File Progress Bar shows the percentage of the Receiving file transferred thus far Total Progress Bar The Total Progress Bar shows the percent complete of the total number bytes of all the files selected for downloa
267. own mark Distance 136 The drawing that follows shows measurements used to compute the full antenna height information Please note that if you have no slant and radius components simply enter the antenna height into the field labeled as Vertical Offset Radius _Ofiset Slant 4 1 5 4 7 Recording Controls The Record Controls window allows you to set parameters that govern the general data recording controls and to set the Save mode of the receiver The following table explains the parameters of this window Parameter Description Data Mode This parameter is typically referred to as the Data Mode of the receiver It defines the format of the data stored by the receiver Consult your Receiver Operations Manual for details on the Data Modes This parameter takes affect in the general recording of GPS data when Session Programming is not in use see Section 4 1 5 4 5 Epoch Interval Specifies the rate in seconds at which GPS data are recorded to memory files This parameter takes affect in the general recording of GPS data when Session Programming is not in use see Section 4 1 5 4 5 COMM Output Interval Specifies the rate in seconds at which GPS data are to be output over the RS 232 ports or over TCP IP sockets for iCGRS receivers Elevation Mask Specifies the data recording and position computation elevation mask 0 to 89 degrees That is any satell
268. ox one selects alternative devices drives on the local PC 199 The final pane of the window contains a set of context sensitive buttons that are related to the local computer system These buttons are as follows This button allows one to create a new folder or subdirectory on the local computer system El This button is a refresh button for the local computer directory information This button exists only because some operating systems do not auto refresh the directory listing components of this window when a change to the files structure occurs e g another program places a file into the directory which is currently being displayed in the Local Computer Area Pressing this refresh button ensures that the directory information displayed is the latest This button is used to upload the currently selected local computer system file to the FTP 7 host system G 3 1 2 2 FTP Host Area Window Elements Section G 3 1 shows a breakdown of the major window elements of the main window The elements labeled FTP Host Area in Section G 3 1 will now be described Within the FTP Host Area is information related to FTP host system and GUI elements that allow one to interact with the FTP host computer system The top pane of this area shows the current directory on the FTP Host system The pane below that shows a directory listing of the current directory of the FTP Host system Each entry within this pane that starts with a d
269. p down list of modems Upon selecting the desired modem the configuration parameters for that modem will become immediately visible and available for editing throughout the rest of the window If the modem you desire to use is not in the list or the list is empty you will have to make a new entry see Section 3 1 2 2 3 1 2 2 Adding a Modem to the List of Modems To add a modem to the list of modems simply press the New button You will be presented with the following dialog window AR the mama of tha madem E xj Hems of the Masten s Xo oma iach i Here you simply enter a string of characters that identifies the modem and then press the OK button After doing so the Modem Configuration window will become active and will be loaded with initial data for each of the configuration items You are then free to edit each of the configuration items for the newly created modem entry 3 1 2 3 Deleting a Modem from the List of Modems From the Modem Configuration window you can delete a modem entry by first selecting that entry from the drop down list and then pressing the Delete button You will not be asked to confirm the deletion All configuration information associated with that entry with be deleted as well 3 1 2 4 Renaming a Modem in the List of Modems From the Modem Configuration window you can rename any modem entry by first selecting that entry from the drop down list and then pressing the Rename but
270. path Error gt 1 644 meters 8 Multipath Error lt 2 453 meters 9 Multipath Error lt 3 660 meters 10 Multipath Error lt 5 460 meters 11 Multipath Error lt 8 145 meters 12 Multipath Error lt 12 151 meters 13 Multipath Error lt 18 127 meters 14 Multipath Error gt 18 127 meters 15 Multipath error not determined Range Each element of the Ranger column contains the pseudorange observation cycles for the satellite on that row 102 4 1 4 6 10 RTCM Type 20 Display RTCM Type 20 messages communicate RTK Carrier Phase Corrections That is corrections to the carrier phase observations The screen capture that follows shows an example display generated by Micro Manager to report RTCM Type 20 messages The display shows the last RTCM Type 20 message sent Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 6 Type 9 Type 15 Type 16 Type 18 Type 19 Type 20 Type 21 ty gt Time Of Message fs 08 48 00 age 00 00 08 04 Station ID fz z count 539 4 Ref Health fo Seq tt T sv Freq wen code auai Loss Corrected Carrier 161412 453 1778576 809 993643 168 7290522 598 721529 168 29455 613 12187 910 7723 102 865833 129 676746 570 ww wa an oeaes F F F F F F F F F F For Type 20 messages the displayed fields and their meanings with the exception of the Corrected Carrier column have the exact same meaning as that discussed for Type 18 messages and therefore you should refer to
271. pe 15 message sent Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 6 Type 9 Type 15 Type 16 Type 18 Type 19 Type 20 Type 21 Ty gt Time Of Message ione Received Station ID zcount Ref Health Seq Ho Type 15 Message Body Available from Receiver The following table contains a description of each parameter displayed in the RTCM Type 15 message display Field Description Time Of The GPS time expressed as time of GPS day at which the Type 15 Message message was sent for Base station or received for Rover stations If the message is over a second old then the time will also contain an age display If such a message has not been sent or received then this field will contain None Received Station ID The RTCM Base Station ID contained in the Type 15 message 97 Field Description Z Count The RTCM message Z Count ZCNT of the Type 15 message The RTCM Z Count is the time tag of the message and is displayed as seconds of the hour GPS time frame Ref Health The health flag being reported in the Type 15 message Seq The RTCM Sequence Number SQNU attached to the RTCM Type 15 message No message body as the uZ Family receivers do not yet communicate the contents of Type 15 messages to Micro Manager 4 1 4 6 7 RTCM Type 16 Display RTCM Type 16 messages communicate a special text message The screen capture that follows shows an example display generate
272. pear smoothed out because they are adjusted by the clock adjustment The clock offset will also show the jump but it WILL accumulate the corrections in the clock offset field Output Site In the RINEX file is an optional record that can be output each Name Change time the site name changes To output these records check Records the checkbox Otherwise these records will not be output Output Doppler The Ashtech receivers also report Doppler observations This to Observation File checkbox is used to select whether or not these observations are to be output to the RINEX Observation file Apply Receiver Generated Code Smoothing The Ashtech receivers also report code smoothing values in their observation data This checkbox is used to select whether or not the smoothing is to be applied to the code phase data before they are output to the RINEX Observation file 3 1 4 5 Meteorological Tab of RINEX Configuration Window The following shows an example of the Meteorological tab of the RINEX Configuration Window AT Important Note RINEX Meteorological data files are only created when the GPS receiver reports meteorological data in its output D File i e one must have a met sensor attached to the GPS receiver In the top section of the Meteorological tab are comment lines that will be added to the Meteorological file header in a comment record The standard header data for this file is
273. ple to send an lt LF gt i e the line feed character press and hold the CTRL i e the control key and then press J Appendix B shows the special characters and their associated control key sequences 3 Commands sent using the Command and Send approach can have the checksum automatically added to the PASH commands when the Add checksum to PASH commands is enabled The Received Data area of the window displays the data being received from the communications port In some cases messages sent from the receiver will not be in a normal human readable form This is because these messages can contain non printable binary characters Micro Manager will show only the ASCII portions of those messages when the Show ASCII only checkbox is checked When this checkbox is unchecked the non ASCII data are shown in a hexadecimal representation of the data i e Ox followed by the hexadecimal number of the character being represented 146 It is important to note that Micro Manager will display almost all of the traffic exchanged between the receiver and the computer Some messages are not displayed because they are either too lengthy or too unimportant to review These messages comprise a few file transfer related windows All other messages are displayed in the Terminal window The Upload File button of the Terminal window is used to allow you to send the contents of a script file to the receiver
274. plot All displayed satellites are displayed with respect to the position reported by the GPS receiver Azimuth 0 to 360 degrees should be obvious Elevation is represented by the position of the satellite with respect to the center and outermost ring That is if the satellite is displayed exactly at the center then its elevation is 90 degrees If the satellite is displayed on the outermost ring then its elevation is 0 degrees Examples from the window above are Satellite Elevation Azimuth 9 27 47 11 6 324 17 6 173 21 76 325 It is important to note that when the GPS receiver does not provide enough information to generate the display which is a rare event the display will remain blank The information required by Micro Manager for this display includes the receiver s position tracking information and satellite almanac information There are several reasons why the receiver may not be able to report its position The most common occurrences are 1 The receiver is initially turned on and has not acquired enough satellites to compute a position 2 You have either not attached an antenna to the receiver or have placed the antenna where it cannot track enough satellites to compute a position The satellite almanac contains information about every satellite in the constellation Normally the receiver keeps a copy of this almanac in memory even between power cycles However when you reset
275. programs that TRUMP calls to convert files UpackU12 is used to convert receiver U Files to Ashtech formatted data processing files e g Ashtech B E and S files XYZAshRx exe is used to convert Ashtech formatted data processing files to the Receiver INdependent Exchange RINEX format Each of these programs can be manually called but when used in conjunction with TRUMP are called automatically by TRUMP H 3 1 Manual GUI Approach Upon starting TRUMP without command line parameters the main program window is displayed 206 Presented above is the Main Window of the program Notice the program has four main menu items When you select the File menu item you will be presented with the following drop down menu stop Processing Files Gtri T Once TRUMP has been configured selecting the Start Processing Files menu item will cause TRUMP to begin the processing of U Files that it finds in the pre defined search directories These directories are defined in the Directories Window presented in Section H 3 1 2 Once started and all of the U Files found have been processed TRUMP will enter a sleep state for the amount of time specified in the Miscellaneous Window which is presented in Section H 3 1 5 At the end of the sleep state TRUMP will again search the specified directories and restart the processing cycle This cycle will continue until the Stop Processing Files menu item is selected or the program is terminat
276. r Micro Manager can be connected to the GPS receiver either directly or through a modem When Micro Manager is started it immediately attempts to open the specified communications port see Section 3 1 1 If the receiver is directly connected to the specified port i e the receiver is connected via RS 232 cable to the computer then the connection is established simply by opening the communication port At this point however Micro Manager does not know the communication parameters of the GPS receiver If the receiver is configured with the same values specified in Micro Manager i e under Section 3 1 1 then no further work is needed to connect with the receiver However if you are unsure of the receiver s communication settings or the lower right corner of the status bar indicates that Micro Manager does not know the type of receiver connected simply select the File menu option of the main window and then select the Poll Receiver Baud sub menu option This will force Micro Manager to detect the receiver s communication parameters please see precautionary notes in Section 3 1 1 when using a USB to serial converter device A modem connection can be initiated using one of two approaches In the first case select the main program s File menu item and then select the Dial submenu item In the second case select the main program s Configuration menu item and then select the Phone List sub menu i
277. r file selection Micro Manager will test play that selected sound file To play a sound file on the Alert condition ensure that the Play sound file on Alert checkbox is checked and you use the associated Select File to select the desired WAV file Upon making your file selection Micro Manager will test play that selected sound file When either a warning condition or an alert condition exists Micro Manager will attempt to play the selected sound files repeatedly with about a 2 second cycle time While Micro Manager will play sound files longer than 2 seconds you are advised to keep your warning and alert sound files shorter than 2 seconds 69 3 1 6 2 Configuring Output Diagnostic Messages ter rime aimen Cite Hz Shot Sours Di Mange uapa Paos biiain E Gap apreis messag ieg Me fag AE On Write wohose dapon masaga te ing ile D liepa ee bg jipra ji meaa When the Output diagnostics message log file checkbox is checked the Log File will be written to the directory specified under the Outputs tab of this window see Section 3 1 6 3 Also when checked diagnostic messages will be written to the Log File Some of these diagnostic messages may not be of interest to some users For this reason you are provided a means of reducing the diagnostic messages to ones that are critical The checkbox labeled Write verbose diagnostic messages to log file when unchecked keeps the diagnostic messages to t
278. r the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File DDDE The 2 digit day of the year of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File RXDDD _ The 3 digit day of the year used in naming any RINEX files HHS The 2 digit hour of the GPS day of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File HHE The 2 digit hour of the GPS day of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File U File as reported by the contents of the U File U File as reported by the contents of the U File MNS The 2 digit minute of the GPS hour of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File 213 MNE The 2 digit minute of the GPS hour of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File The 2 digit minute truncated to the quarter hour of the GPS hour of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File The 2 digit minute truncated to the quarter hour of the GPS hour of the end of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File SSS The 2 digit second of the GPS minute of the start of the data for the receiver U File as reported by the contents of the U File Fle as reported by the contents of the U File The mnemonic will be translated to a single
279. rameter Delay Between Searches allows the user to specify the amount of time that the program should wait between cycles of searching processing U Files This allows the program to enter a sleep state in which it uses considerably less processing power The final Parameter Scratch Directory allows the user to select the scratch folder where Trump will store temporary files created during processing This folder must be specified in order for Trump to function properly H 3 2 Command Line Approach The Command Line approach to running TRUMP is invoked by calling the program with the command line parameters listed in this section The Command Line approach permits automatic conversion of U Files to Ashtech data files and to RINEX files without human intervention This includes the execution of any Post Convert commands that are configured and enabled The Command Line Approach makes the assumption that you have pre configured Directories Post Convert Commands RINEX Header Data and any Miscellaneous items using the Manual GUI approach Once the configuration has been entered using the menus of Section 224 H 3 1 and you have exited the Manual GUI run of the program the configuration will be saved and usable from the Command Line approach The general form of the command line call to TRUMP is as follows TRUMP EXE d time Notice that you are required to use both the d and delay time Example TRUMP EXE d 3000
280. rameter of this window is labeled as Have receiver initialize the modem When this checkbox is checked and you press the Send button Micro Manager will not only send parameters according to the settings displayed in the window but will ask the receiver to send the modem initialization strings to the modem The receiver will report to Micro Manager the success or failure to initialize the receiver s modem Micro Manager will pass that report on to you When you get a failure you will get the following message ERROR Modem Initialization Response x Receiver reports a modem initialization FAILURE status You can test your modem initialization string by directly connecting your Receiver s modem via RS 232 to your computer configuring Micro Manager to use that port and using Micro Manager s Terminal Window see Section 4 1 6 to manually send the modem initialization string to the modem The Terminal Window will report exactly what the modem responds with Thus you must be familiar with your modem manuals to have success with this test 4 1 5 4 4 Receiver Fixed Position The Receiver Fixed Position window is used to set the receiver reference position This reference position is used when the receiver is configured as an RTCM base station or an RTK base station in the computations needed to support the base station For example when configured as an RTCM base station the receiver needs to know the reference coordinat
281. ration main menu item a drop down menu similar to the following will be displayed ETP Host Sites Options 192 The FTP Host Sites menu option is used to configure and or connect to Host FTP sites The Options menu item is used to set various program options specific to your local system environment and as such this will be described first G 3 1 1 1 Configuration FTP Host Sites Upon selecting the FTP Host Sites sub menu item of the main menu Configuration item a window similar to the following will be displayed FTP Site Selection Lonnectijn _ x enamesite Deletesite adaste f ftp ashtech com froasmecneom O Z el a E FORY SETUETS PORY POTE bp J That Host s system administrator controls access to an FTP Server Consequently in order to gain access to an FTP server an account password and access permissions must be granted created by the administrator of that system This is important especially with regard to access permissions XYZs_FTP is capable of uploading files to and downloading files from an FTP Server as well as creating and deleting host server directories However the account that is setup by the system administrator must grant all of these capabilities or can restrict or deny any of them Therefore your ability to use features of the FTP program are highly dependent upon the account and whatever access privileges are grante
282. respectively The set of Connection Failure strings defines possible errors reported 35 by your modem that occur when attempting to establish a connection with a remote modem Micro Manager will report only these errors to you If a reported error does not fall into one of these four Connect Failure categories Micro Manager will not detect it The set of connection responses helps Micro Manager detect when a connection is actually established Older generation modems required that the computer to modem modem to modem and modem to receiver data links maintain the exact same communication speed Newer modems do not have this requirement When using older modems you must force Micro Manager to change the PC communication port speed to that reported by the modem You do this by selecting the checkbox labeled Force link speed to connection speed and then enter the correct modem responses for each possible modem speed Again newer modems do not have this requirement Most modems will respond to the connection with strings like the following CONNECT 19200 Vbis CONNECT 33600 Vbis V90 CONNECT 53333 In each case Micro Manager does not need to obtain the full response from the modem to determine that the connection was successful In the above example we have simply encoded the string CONNECT that is we do not need to know the connection speed nor do we need to detect the carriage return character We do not need to know
283. ress 205 H 3 RUNNING TRUMP nerien einna iea sens sat deo aleve 205 H 3 1 Manual Gul Approach cessssssssssscscnssssccsscnssssscsscnsssnsensensssnsensenseees 206 H 3 1 1 Diagnostic Messages Window 0 0 csceesssenessteesececeseseseseseacscecscseeeeseceeeeeeseneneneneeeetees 209 FE3 122 Directories Wid Wises ss sp se sda bis thns bob a a Aa a a A E bob ha 209 H 3 1 2 1 Directories MneMomnics eee se seececcecsesenenensececececesesesesescscececseseeseseseseceseenenenes 212 H 3 1 3 Post Convert Commands Window csssssssssesssssssssesesececeeeeeeseseceeeceseenenensneeeeeeeaees 214 H 3 1 3 1 Editing Post Convert Commands c ccsesssesscssessssseseseseceeeeseeeseseeeseeneneneneeeeees 215 9 H 3 1 4 RINEX Configuration Window H 3 1 5 Miscellaneous Configuration Options Window H 3 2 Command Line Approach H 3 3 Networking Information 10 Chapter 0 Micro Manager vs Micro Manager Pro There are two basic editions of Micro Manager Micro Manager and Micro Manager Pro Throughout this document we generically refer to Micro Manager and do not highlight the differences between Micro Manager and Micro Manager Pro The primary differences between the two editions at the current time are the remote access features That is Micro Manager Pro provides facilities for remote access 1 e local computer modem configurations telephone dialing directories modem dialing and disconnect options and automatic command line driv
284. rn A so 14 016 Ox0E Shift Out O SI 15 017 Ox0F Shift In P DLE 16 020 0x10 Data Link Enable Q DC1 17 021 Ox11l Device Control 1 R DC2 18 022 0x12 Device Control 2 Ss DC3 19 023 0x13 Device Control 3 cF DC4 20 024 0x14 Device Control 4 U NAK 21 025 0x15 Negative Acknowledge 153 Sequence Character Decimal Octal Value Hexadecimal Description Name Value Value V SYN 22 026 0x16 Synchronize Idle W ETB 23 027 0x17 End Transmission Block X CAN 24 030 0x18 Cancel AN EM 25 031 0x19 End of Medium 07 SUB 26 032 Ox1A Substitute I ESC 27 033 Ox1B Escape N FS 28 034 Ox1C File Separator j GS 29 035 Ox1D Group Separator an US 31 036 Ox1F Unit Separator 154 Appendix C Upload File Format Section 4 1 6 and 4 2 of this document describe the process of uploading script files to the uZ Family of receivers using Micro Manager This section describes the format of those script files The general format of the Upload File is ASCII text However some messages sent to an Ashtech receiver may need to contain binary data In fact almost every message sent to an Ashtech receiver requires the lt CR gt lt LF gt carriage return line feed sequence at the end of the message For these reasons we need a means of entering binary data into the upload file There are also cases where it is helpful to have the upload process pause during the upload of
285. rogram on the diskette located in the A or B drive of the computer Internet Micro Manager installer files downloaded from the Ashtech Web page will Download likely be in the form of a single PkZipped file Simply unzip this file into the same temporary directory that you create on your hard drive Then browse using Explorer or a like approach to the temporary folder where the file was unzipped and double click the program SETUP EXE Note After the installation has completed successfully you can remove the files in the temporary folder Itis suggested however that you make a backup copy of these files in case you later need to reinstall the Once you have started the SETUP EXE program described in the above table the installer program will start The install program guides you through the installation of the Micro Manager software At each step you will be given an opportunity to accept default options or tailor these to your individual needs You will be required to enter your 8 character serial number For the CD ROM distribution form the serial number is located on the CD ROM jewel case and the original software container box For the diskette distribution form the serial number is located on each of the Micro Manager installation diskettes and the original software container box For Internet forms the serial number must be obtained from the original form CD ROM or diskette shipped to you The following is
286. rom the receiver After making several attempts Micro Manager will begin reporting errors These reports will persist while the receiver status windows are active 75 Chapter 4 Running Micro Manager 4 0 RUNNING Micro Manager OVERVIEW This chapter provides a description of Micro Manager once it has been configured Before actually running Micro Manager you will need to have installed the software sentinel key and then have configured Micro Manager Chapter 3 provides a description of the configuration process Micro Manager provides two main modes of operation 1 user interactive mode and 2 command line mode In user interactive mode described in Section 4 1 users are free to interact with the program through its extensive Graphical User Interface GUI When it is desired to operate the program in an automated fashion e g using a batch file the command line mode is used The command line mode described in Section 4 2 utilizes all of the configuration information entered by the user during the previous GUI mode run of the program That is one uses the GUI mode to configure the program to suit particular needs and then subsequently launches Micro Manager in command line mode It is important to note there are no software protections within Micro Manager to prohibit you from interacting with the program when it is in command line mode However you are strongly urged not to do so unless you have a specific reason to do so Micro
287. rs the following is displayed 161 A Ashtech Raw to RINEX Converter 32 bit The XYZ s of GPS Inc DFR Mere PEDO Ma E 3 gs si Ps w i amp E s E s E ECAA REY Presented above are the Main Window of the program and the File Selection Window The File Selection Window is presented automatically at the start of the program as a means of saving time and will be described in more detail in Section E 3 1 1 For now we will assume that the File Selection Window has been closed to facilitate the description of the program s main window The main window of the program has the following appearance 162 S Ashtech Raw to RINEX Converter 32 bit The XYZ s of GPS Inc Oy Xx The XYZ SofGPS Ine The XYZ SofGPS Inc The XYZ S0 The XYZ s of G Sine The XYZ S of GPS Jne The XYZ S 0 The XYZ sof GPS Inc The XYZSofGPS Inc The XYZS 0 The XYZ of GPS Inc The XYZSofGPS Inc The XYZS 0 Notice the program has only two main menu items When you select the Convert menu item you will be presented with the following drop down menu That is you can only Convert To RINEX using XYZAshRx Upon selecting the Obs and Nav to RINEX option you will be presented with the File Selection Window presented in Section E 3 1 1 Upon selecting the Met to RINEX option you will be presented with the RINEX Meteorolog
288. runs the batch file in that environment You must however clearly state in the text of the command line call that the file being executed is a batch file You do this by appending the file type to the execution command For example suppose you had a batch file named RENAMER BAT in the directory C BATCHES Your command line text should look something like the following C BATCHES RENAMER BAT Notice that the BAT extent has been added Intrinsic MS DOS functions cannot be directly called from the command line of Micro Manager Intrinsic MS DOS functions have no associated EXE file on your hard drive Examples of these functions are del rename copy and mkdir If you wish to use an intrinsic MS DOS functions you must embed them in a batch file and execute the batch file using a post download command 3 1 5 4 Post Download Command Line Examples 65 In this section several post download command examples are presented Many assumptions are made in these examples and will therefore not necessarily work in your environment These assumptions include such things as hard drive letters and directories in which files are stored Thus if you wish to use the examples you must edit and tailor them to your computer system environment 3 1 5 4 1 Moving Data Files to a Date Based Directory Micro Manager outputs data to a fixed output directory However using the Post Download feature of Micro Manager we
289. rvation for the satellite on that row According to the RTCM standard Version 2 2 the cumulative loss of continuity indicator will be incremented each time there is an unfixed cycle slip or loss of lock Once the counter reaches its maximum value i e 32 it will roll over to 0 Carrier Each element of the Carrier column contains the carrier phase observation cycles for the satellite on that row 4 1 4 6 9 RTCM Type 19 Display RTCM Type 19 messages communicate uncorrected pseudorange measurements typically used in Real Time Kinematic and differential applications The screen capture that follows shows an example display generated by Micro Manager to report RTCM Type 19 messages The display shows the last RTCM Type 19 message sent Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 6 Type 9 Type 15 Type 16 Type 18 Type 19 Type 20 Type 21 Ty 4 gt Time Of Message fi8 34 18 00 age 00 00 05 02 Station ID fi23 Z Count 206 4 Ref Health pb Seq 11 L4 0 CA 7 15 23738609 860 11 L2 0 P 7 15 23738619 340 15 L4 0 CA 7 15 23767573 240 15 L2 0 P 7 15 23767585 780 21 L4 0 CA 7 15 20520511 760 21 L2 0 P 7 15 20520518 040 23 L4 0 CA 7 15 23807011 660 23 L2 0 P 7 15 23807026 160 25 L4 0 CA 7 15 21897281 780 26 L2 0 P 7 15 21897286 440 100 The following table contains a description of each parameter displayed in the RTCM Type 19 message display Field Description Time Of
290. s information as its reference station ID STID When in Remote Station mode the field identifies the RTCM Base station source for RTCM messages This field will be disabled when not in Base or Remote RTCM mode Ref Health The health of the reference station or STHE This field is not editable when in the RTCM Remote mode or the Disabled mode When set in Base mode the receiver does not permit lower values of the reference station health unless the RTCM processing is reset Thus you will not be permitted to enter values lower than are currently entered in the field unless you check the Reset RTCM Processing checkbox in this window Max Age The primary use of this field is to specify the maximum age MAXAGBE in seconds of RTCM Base station messages to be applied in a Remote station processing Quality In Remote Mode this field QAFREQ allows for the evaluation of the communication quality between the base station and the user equipment The field is not applicable when in RTCM Base mode To get a full meaning of this parameter please consult your receiver operations manual Auto differential Mode When checked permits the automatic differential mode of the receiver Remote mode only Allows the receiver to compute autonomous positions when no RTCM differential corrections are available or have exceeded the MAX Age parameter Reset RTCM Processing Checking this checkbox and then pressing the
291. s the above operations described for both Internal and External will be performed As was indicated in the above table whenever the External or Int amp Ext operations are selected and you press the OK button the external memory reset operation will take place This reset operation will clear the receiver s data file storage memory and in that process validate that memory area You can observe the validation results by Opening Micro Manager s Terminal window see Section 4 1 6 before opening the Receiver Reset Window If the terminal window is open when one performs this reset operation the terminal window will display the response given by the receiver This response could take several minutes depending upon the amount of memory your GPS receiver has installed The following is an example response you would see in the Terminal window SPASHR ACK SPASHR CLM WAIT 11 SPASHR CLM SIZE 03912KB 33 SPASHR CLM PASSED 0A Whenever any one of the above reset operations is selected you will be presented the following window WARNING Must Restart Eg This operation has reset receiver s internal parameters and will require that this program terminate Please wait 5 minutes before restarting this program as the receiver is resetting Failure to comply with this request could result in erronous receiver behavior This window indicates that the reset operation will cause a loss of communication with the GPS
292. s no errors with the Post Download Command the Warn entry for that command is blank However one should not be lulled into a false sense of security with respect to the lack of any warning indication Specifically Micro Manager can only perform limited checks on the commands Furthermore some checks cannot occur until the command is actually launched Therefore the command may contain errors that Micro Manager cannot detect To determine the rationale for the warnings detected by Micro Manager one should highlight the offending command press the Edit button and then press the Verify button of the displayed Post Download Command Line Editor window During run time Micro Manager records information about the post download commands in the output Log File when it is enabled see Section 3 1 6 2 This information will include the fully expanded post download command or the rationale as to why the post download command failed The post download commands will only launch if at run time there are no warnings in the set of enabled post download commands Additionally Micro Manager will terminate the set of post download commands upon receiving an error from the operating system on any command If you enabled the Micro Manager Log File see Section 3 1 6 2 information on all post download commands will be written to that file The Log File can be very helpful in testing and debugging your entered post download commands That is
293. s stored in the receiver immediately after a firmware loading operation Thales Navigation strongly recommends that after loading any new firmware into the receiver you issue a full Internal and External memory reset as described in Section 4 1 5 2 If you answer No to the above prompt Micro Manager will issue another prompt window Residual File Data p 9 Because you have decided not to replace the receiver s firmare it is suggested that you remove the file from the receiver s memory Would you like to delete the uploaded file from the receiver s memory this will not change the firmware already used by the receiver This window is simply indicating that you have left a firmware file in the same memory area as is used for normal data file storage Because the file is occupying valuable data storage memory you should delete that file However you can leave the firmware file in receiver s memory by answering No and then later burn that firmware using the firmware burn command i e the PASHS FSH command described in your receiver manual from the Terminal Window of Micro Manager see Section 4 1 6 If you answer Yes to the Confirm Firmware Replacement prompt the firmware upload window will be redisplayed and show a count down timer in the status information area Frimware Upload x Select Firmware Directory ESEMAILSWZFIRMWAREWFB1 Browse Curr
294. s to this configuration table using the RINEX Site Header Tables sub menu selection of the Configuration main menu selection or through the RINEX Config button of Micro Manager s Receiver Files Window see Section 4 1 5 1 After using either approach the RINEX Configuration Window will be presented The sub sections that follow provide a description of each tabbed section of this window Included in the header configuration parameters are options for naming RINEX output files That is uZ CGRS receivers are capable of recording up to 96 files per day The standard RINEX 8 3 naming convention does not support more that 35 files in a day A newer 10 3 RINEX file naming convention was developed to address this problem As such Micro Manager allows users to select the form of the naming convention desired for output either 8 3 or 10 3 NOTE The RINEX Site Header Table feature is a Micro Manager Pro only feature 3 1 4 1 File Name Modes of RINEX Configuration Window The following shows an example of the File Name Modes tab of the RINEX Configuration Window 41 Dis ere idee gee Cremen aaka Piservenese Hiie irana EBRI takni He aa Pad ac irate LIET Ba Takin feels LO REN dersim 2 Cee Ti biren Comerica Ty EBEE 8 heei te Pie Morera E Through this tab one configures the options related to naming RINEX files That is uZ CGRS receivers are capable of recording up to 96 files per day The
295. scsscsscnssssscnscnsscnscnsensssssensensesncensenss 172 APPENDIX F UpackU12 A Micro Manager Utility 176 F 1 Introduction to UPacn U1 pcssccsse hss ead ceasing das 176 F 1 1 Minimum System Requirements c ccsssssscssessscssscsscssscssccsseessessees 176 F 1 2 Demo Versi nS isiin ieis 177 F 2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW s ssssssssssssossossssssnsoseasosessssoseassecsssesssesoeseeees 177 ES RUNNING UPackUI2 pnan 178 F 3 1 Manual GUI Approach seeesosssessecccseorssssessceccorsosssssesceerorssssseseeseeeesess 178 F311 Output Pile Path yasmina ren a nepa ne eee siii aeniei 180 F 3 1 2 File Selection Window s cisenicocincrineiiernnn iinn a eari 180 F 3 1 3 Image Conversion Progress WindOW sssssssssesssssssesessecececeeeeeesetececeeeenenensnteeeseeanes 184 F 3 2 Command Line Approach esesesesessececersossesseescceeorsossssseesceorsossssssesceeeees 185 APPENDIX G XYZs_FTP An FTP Utility Progradm cccsseceeeeseees 187 G 1 Introduction to XYZs_FTP isscscssccsssesccccsscisiessibsncsetsesiesstiesieaceseiaierbenteseeviebs 187 G 1 1 Minimum System Requirements scscscscsssssssssssesssssssssesssssesssesssessness 187 G 2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW Q ssssssssssssssssssssssssensssesossoseasseesssesscassscosssonses 187 G 3 RUNNING ALS DE sctiinss ssi otes each seceties esse ied tees heateah iain 188 G 3 1 Manuals Gul ADproden iivcissccccsscvsiscreatenscivieuanas cia ninistnsioend uns 190 G 3 1 1 C
296. sed Memory Warning Size through the above edit window The maximum value accepted by Micro Manager is 1024 KBytes or 1 Mbyte Additionally you can monitor the receiver s memory and observe any degradation through the Unavailable Memory field of the following pop up window 113 Receiver Memory Status Total Receiver Memory 40026112 Boot Fat Dir gtg04 Reserved 12 Files 8293376 Files Overhead Bytes 434072 Available File Memory 31636968 Unavailable Memory 4352 Note The above window will automatically be displayed simply by resting the mouse pointer over the warning message described above This window will automatically close when you move the mouse pointer outside of the warning message display area or when the window is displayed for 15 seconds The Unavailable Memory field of the Receiver Memory Status window displays the number of bytes occupied by the non U files and bad memory blocks or sectors If there are no non U files in the receiver s memory and the receiver s memory card begins to degrade then the Unavailable Memory may begin to increase rapidly 4 1 5 1 1 Downloading Selected Files To download a given file or set of files select the appropriate files and then press the Download button You will be prompted to continue or to abort the current download operation when the available disk space on the target disk drive see Section 3 1 6 3 may not be en
297. sor on one of the fields and right click to bring up a special session programming pop up menu and select the Delete Session item To add a new daily session or to insert a new one on a one time basis add it in an empty slot at the end of the list of non zero sessions i e those without zeroed start and end times You will be given an opportunity to sort the sessions in chronological order This will be described in the following paragraph During the editing of the session programming data Micro Manager will verify that the enabled sessions do not overlap Once verified and Micro Manager detects that the sessions are not in chronological order you are given the opportunity to sort them Micro Manager indicates the need to sort the sessions by enabling the Sort button and displaying a message in the lower left corner of the Session Programming window You then can sort the sessions by pressing the Sort button Sorting the sessions simply makes them more readable When sessions overlap Micro Manager reports the condition in the lower left corner of the Session Programming window and the Send button is then disabled 134 After you have completed the changes to the session programming including enabling and disabling the session programming feature press the Send button to send the sessions to the receiver for programming Micro Manager will perform a validity check of the sessions programmed by th
298. splay all of the status 77 windows described under Sections 4 1 4 and 4 1 6 You are free to move all of the sub windows within this area Moving a window beyond the display region of this area will cause scroll bars within the work area to be displayed These scroll bars will allow you to scroll through the display area 4 1 1 2 RS 232 Line Status Indicators The RS 232 Line Status Indicators are located in the upper right area of the Micro Manager window and are used to provide a positive indication of the RS 232 status lines They become active as soon as a valid communications port has been specified see Section 3 1 1 For remote connections i e via modem both the CTS indicator is normally green while the DSR does not fill with a color For direct connections the status of the DSR and CTS indicators depends upon the type receiver connected or the port of certain receiver types and whether or not the associated hardware flow control lines have been enabled in Micro Manager In Section 3 1 1 we described the slight hardware variations in the uZ Family of receivers and how to configure the Local PC s communication port according to the hardware capabilities of the port of the GPS receiver Again with the exception of Port A of uZ CGRS receivers the DTR DSR hardware handshaking lines ARE NOT implemented This implies that with the exception of being connected to Port A of uZ CGRS receivers the DSR indicator should be blank
299. ssage was written The following is a screen capture showing the log file configuration tab 197 FTP Configuration The checkbox labeled Output log file is used to enable disable the log file output When checked the output log file option is enabled Simply use the Browse button to select the directory within which the log files will be created Log files created when XYZs_FTP is run have the following naming convention FTPyyddd LOG where yy Year of log file creation 2 digits ddd The day of the year of log file creation 3 digits The year and day of year values are obtained from the CPU clock If the program is started and the log file name generated by the program matches one already on the system in the specified output log directory then XYZs_FTP will append to that file Log files are opened when the program starts and close when the program ends That is if the program runs continuously for several days only one log file will be active and have a file name that corresponds to the time at which the program was started G 3 1 2 Performing FTP Functions To begin FTP functions one must be connected to an FTP host site However to connect to a site and to perform FTP functions two elements must already be in place 1 Your computer must be capable of connecting to a network that communicates with the Host FTP site and 2 An access account must be configured on the Host site that grants you FTP
300. sssecscscseseeeseceseceeessesesenensnseeeneeees 99 4 1 4 6 9 RTCM Type 19 Display wii s cccsceietsinsecte tee enni n 100 4 1 4 6 10 RTCM Type 20 Display escssssssssececssessssssssssscseseeeseseseceseceeseneneeneeteeeeeenes 103 4 1 4 6 11 RTCM Type 21 Display eceessessssesecesssssessssssscseeeeessseseseeeseeseseneeneeeeeeaeees 103 4 1 4 6 12 RTCM Type 22 Display esesesessssesecssessssssssesscseseseseeeseseceseeseneneeeeeeeeeeenes 104 4 1 4 7 Satellite Visibility Window 20 0 eeesessssesesesesesesesssesescscscscseeeesececececsesenenenseseseeenensnanes 105 4 1 5 Receiver Interfacing Windows wi cssissesiscssdseossecvssevascsvondteusdennagsssocousssssustesdssovetsesdsonses 107 4 1 5 1 Downloading and Deleting Receiver Files eseseseesteeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeneneneeeeeeenaees 108 4 1 5 1 1 Downloading Selected Files eeeesssssesescesessesesececeesesenenenseeececsssssaravaeaseees 114 4 1 5 1 2 Deleting Selected Files cccsceccscssssnssenssessecsaseveneneneusecesssesesespsesasessegnsnseeneanezeease 117 4 1 5 1 3 Download and then Delete Selected Files eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneneeneeees 117 4 1 5 2 Resetting Receiver Firmware 0 0 ececeesesssessssececesesesesesesescecseeeeeesesececeesenenensnseeeeeeaees 117 4 15 3 Upload Firmware in s 585 asia aici aire antisite aieishecrn Avi e a Wien Analviciente a nkicle 120 41 54 Receiver Settings monni a nacdhnndna nada ngannchsuianedhind O E EA 125 4 1 5 4 1 Receiver Clock Parameters s
301. standard RINEX 8 3 naming convention does not support more that 35 files in a day A newer 10 3 RINEX file naming convention was developed to address this need The following shows the RINEX 8 3 file naming convention nnnnddds yyt where nnnn ddd yy represents the 4 character station name represents the day of the year represents the session code represents the last two digits of the year and represents the file type O for RINEX Observation File N for RINEX Navigation File and M for a RINEX Meteorological File The RINEX 10 3 convention follows nnnndddhmm yyt where nnnn ddd h yy represents the 4 character station name represents the day of the year represents the start hour of the data A for 0 B for 1 X for 23 represents the start minute of the data represents the last two digits of the year and represents the file type O for RINEX Observation File N for RINEX Navigation File and M for a RINEX Meteorological File 42 The two radio buttons allow one to select which form should be used When the 10 3 form is selected an additional parameter i e 10 3 Duration for File Naming is used This Duration parameter specifies how long the RINEX files are intended to be i e it specifies an expectation and is used to generate the mm part of the file name The mm part indicates how many divisions within an hour and Micro Manager w
302. strongly advised not to launch more than one copy of UPackU12 from the same directory unless both copies will use the exact same configuration information Launching several copies of UPackU12 each originating from its own directory is perfectly acceptable and supported by the sentinel key F 3 1 Manual GUI Approach 178 Upon starting UPackU12 without command line parameters the following is displayed Ashtech u212 Image File Unpack Program Notice the program has only two main menu items When you select the File menu item you will be presented with the following drop down menu That is you can only Convert to Ashtech processing using UPackU12 or set the output path Upon selecting the Convert option you will be presented with the File Selection Window presented in Section F 3 1 2 Through this window you will select the input and output files of a single conversion run When you select the Help menu item from the main menu you will be presented with the following drop down menu When you select the About menu item UPackU12 will display a window containing information about the program In response to selecting the Command Line Options item 179 UPackU12 will display a window describing how to invoke the Command Line Mode of the program The command line mode is further documented in Section F 3 2 of this manual F 3 1 1 Output File Path To set the default outp
303. t files will be placed in the directory E RINEX OUT The S option allows you to specify whether the converter will output smoothed or raw codephase measurements Permissible values for this parameter are 0 and 1 the value 1 directs the program to output the smoothed codephase contained in the Ashtech B File When the S option is not specified XYZAshRx will apply the smoothing as if S 1 were specified on the command line The C option is used to specify whether or not the site name change records are to be written to the output RINEX Observation file Permissible values for this parameter are 0 and 1 the value 1 directs the program to output the site name change records When the C option is not specified XYZAshRx will output site name change records as if C 1 were specified on the command line Some examples are listed below Example 7 XYZAshRx I BN102A97 323 EN102A97 323 SN102A97 323 S 1 Example 8 The converter uses the files BN102A97 323 EN102A97 323 and SN102A97 323 from the current working directory as the input B E and S Files respectively Because no O or N parameters were specified XYZAshRx will automatically name the RINEX observation and navigation output files The output files will be placed in the same directory as that of the B File which is the current working directory in this case Additionally the S parameter specifies that the converter will output Ashtech smoo
304. t have an Ethernet port in place of the second receiver power input port When one presses the Network Settings sub menu item or the corresponding main window button Micro Manager first ensures that that attached receiver is in fact an iCGRS receiver If the attached receiver is not an iCGRS receiver or the RS 232 port is not connected to either Ports A or B of an iCGRS an error message will be displayed and the Network Configuration window 126 will not be displayed When these conditions are met a window similar to the following will be displayed In the above screen capture notice that most of the edit fields are disabled which is indicated by their grayed out appearance This occurs when the attached iCGRS receiver s networking facilities are enabled In this case one must suspend the networking features of the receiver before continuing The Suspend Receiver Network Features button is used to accomplish this and the window will be redisplayed with the appropriate edit fields enabled 127 Most of the parameters of this window should be familiar to your system network administrator Please consult your network system administrator for values that are appropriate for you system network After completing the editing of the network parameters you should select i e set to the checked state the checkbox labeled Issue networking RESTART after sending the network configuration When this is ch
305. t of remote receivers and then use the AT feature of Windows NT to schedule the execution of that batch program Users desiring more elaborate and or user friendly scheduling features can employ commercially available scheduling programs such as Norton Scheduler Micro Manager contains a Post Download Command feature that allows users to configure and call applications that may operate on data created by Micro Manager For example one can configure Micro Manager to call an FTP program that will create target directories on an FTP server and then upload data files created by Micro Manager to that FTP Server When it becomes necessary to change your receiver s firmware you will find that Thales Navigation has paid particular attention to providing reliable and stable firmware uploads That is Micro Manager contains a built in firmware uploading capability that utilizes a protective firmware upload protocol reliable firmware file formats and very stringent firmware crosscheck procedures The result is a reliable means of upgrading your receiver s firmware either through a direct connection or a remote connection Additionally Micro Manager has been designed to operate in concert with other commercially available software packages such as Bulletin Board Systems BBS and FTP servers It must be emphasized that Micro Manager does not by itself contain all of the tools necessary for automated Internet and BBS operation Rather it has been desi
306. t the ASCII Transfer Mode On i e the checkbox should be checked However because this program was designed as a companion program for GPS binary data files it is recommended that you leave this checkbox unchecked until it is needed G 3 1 1 2 Configuration Options There are several miscellaneous configuration options of XYZs_FTP that are reached by selecting the main menu Configuration item and then selecting the Options sub menu item The displayed window is divided into three categories each of which are described in the following sub sections G 3 1 1 2 1 Configuring Auto Options The Auto Options tab of the FTP Configuration Window is used to set some parameters that will be used by the program when it is run in command line mode see Section G 3 2 That is this program can be run from command line mode and has been designed to operate with other programs in an unattended mode For example when this program is operated in the GUI mode and connection attempt to a server fails the operator gets an immediate notification and he she can decide to try again or wait until later When this program is operated in a command line mode and a connection to a particular host site fails some action must be taken to try to re connect to that server later The Auto Options tab of this window allows one to configure the parameters that govern the re connect process 195 The following is an example of the
307. tart time of the file Otherwise the program will default to a start time based upon the CPU clock which you should override if it is not correct When the input file is an Ashtech D File and it contains meteorological data the time stamps of the data are unambiguous For this reason when the input file is an Ashtech D File the start time and Leap Second related prompts are disabled E 3 1 2 3 Leap Seconds UTC to GPS Conversion Two key facts must be considered when converting the NMEA capture file created by GBSS 1 the NMEA GXP message contains only time of day time tags and 2 the message contains UTC time tags In this Section we address item 2 item 1 is addressed in Section E 3 1 2 2 The RINEX standard requires that the time tags of the meteorological data be in GPS time The NMEA GXP message i e the message used to time tag the meteorological data contains UTC time stamps As such we must convert the times to GPS The Leap Seconds data entry field of the window allows you to specify the delta between GPS and UTC As of January 8 1999 there are 13 leap seconds between UTC and GPS That is UTC 13 GPS time The value of the Leap Seconds field will be saved between runs of the program Furthermore it will be used during the command line conversion of meteorological data see Section E 3 2 170 When the input file is an Ashtech D File and it contains meteorological data the time stamps of the data are
308. te To successfully complete the iCGRS firmware load it is recommended that you follow the next two steps in order 1 Reconnect to the iCGRS receiver and perform a complete Int amp Ext Reset as per Section 4 1 5 2 which will force you to again disconnect from the receiver and THEN 2 Reconnect again to the iCGRS receiver and issue the network RESTART using the Receiver Network Settings window see Section 4 1 5 4 2 Upon selecting the Upload Firmware option you will be presented with a window similar to the following Frimware Upload x m Select Firmware Directory JEATEMP4 Browse M Current Status Receiver Firmware Version Jurgo Free Receiver Memory erzoos08 Firmware File Version Status Information FAILED Firmware File Validation A Start Upicad Contig Protocol x Cancel etre Ashtech The field labeled as Receiver Firmware Version displays the version of firmware currently loaded into the receiver s memory The Free Receiver Memory field describes how much memory i e within the GPS receiver is available for firmware uploads The Select Firmware Directory will display the directory in which Micro Manager will look for firmware files to be uploaded to the receiver To select a different directory press the Browse button and you will be given the opportunity to find the directory that contains your firmware files Once you have s
309. tem In either case the Telephone Directory window described in Section 3 1 3 will be displayed Simply select the desired target system s telephone number and then press the Dial button During the attempt to establish a modem connection a status window will be displayed reporting the progress An example is provided below Calling Site ASHT Humber 1 408 524 1400 Status Initializing the modem Once the connection is established the window will be removed 80 4 1 3 Terminating a Remote Connection with the GPS Receiver To terminate a remote connection i e a modem connection to a receiver you can either terminate the program or select the File main menu option followed by the Disconnect sub menu option If you issue these commands during a file download or firmware upload operation you will be asked to confirm the termination of the link 4 1 4 Status and Display Sub Windows Micro Manager provides the following sub windows that can be displayed while connected to a receiver 1 Diagnostic Messages window 2 Receiver Tracking Status window 3 Earth Centered Earth Fixed Position and Time window 4 Geodetic Position and Time window 5 Receiver Information window 6 RTCM Status window 7 Satellite Visibility window Each of these windows is accessed via the View menu selection from Micro Manager and then selecting the appropriate display You can also access the lat
310. temporally placed in a scratch directory and are moved to the target directories once the conversion process finishes Through this feature you can have TRUMP organize the U File specific directory structure on your system For example you can have TRUMP create folders based on information found in the U File and its converted counterparts This simple feature provides a very powerful organizational system When directories are created in this manor all of the information needed is provided from TRUMP U Files and the U Files converted counter parts This allows directory creation without human interaction The basic problem is how can TRUMP provide information that is needed to create these directories For example how can TRUMP create a directory that contains the start times of the files just converted After all with each file converted the start time of the U Files will likely be different The answer is mnemonics A mnemonic is a placeholder for an entity that will later be replaced by an actual value For example TRUMP maintains a mnemonic for the GPS Week of the start of the data for the converted receiver U File as GPWS Notice that the mnemonic both starts and ends with a dollar character This is because TRUMP must be able to recognize the entities i e mnemonics that will later be substituted with actual values To re write the above example in a TRUMP mnemonic form one could write the following c GPW
311. ter six windows by selecting the Receiver main menu option and then selecting the View Receiver Status sub menu option Once a status window is displayed you are free to resize any one of them to suite your individual layout preferences To return any window to its default size with the exception of the Diagnostic Messages window simply right click within the display area of the window and choose the Window Size to Default option It is important to note that when any of the latter six windows are displayed Micro Manager will attempt to query the receiver for the information needed This may seem obvious but it is important It is important because even if you do not have a receiver attached to the computer either directly or through a modem Micro Manager will attempt to request the data from the receiver Because no receiver would be responding to the query Micro Manager will begin reporting errors To circumvent the error reporting you will need to close the window and then re open it after you have established a connection If you exit the program and have not closed these sub windows then the next time you start Micro Manager the windows will still be in their opened state If at that moment a receiver is not attached the program will again begin reporting errors Section 3 1 6 5 describes how to have these windows automatically suppressed at the start of Micro Manager Suppressing these windows at program start up will
312. ter will not be transmitted to the modem Rather the characters preceding the character will be transmitted Micro Manager will delay an amount of time and then the characters after the symbol will be transmitted Both the character used to represent the delay and the duration of the delay are set by you using the Miscellaneous tab of this window See Section 3 1 2 8 Please note that all instances of the delay character will be translated to delays That is there is no sequence through which you can send the character when it has been assigned the role of the delay character If you need to send the character that is represented by the delay character then change the delay character to something not used in the modem strings It is also important to note that the delay character that you select should not be confused with that used by the modem To explain most Hayes compatible modems use the comma character to insert a delay Consider the following examples of strings sent to the modem from Micro Manager 1 ATDT 9 18005551212 M 2 ATDT 9 18005551212 M In both of the examples we will assume that the character is the Micro Manager delay character and the comma character is the modem delay character In case 1 Micro Manager sends the string ATDT 9 waits three times the delay programmed for the symbol sends the string 18005551212 and then sends a carriage return character in place
313. that if you want to auto configure sessions and you want to change the default values for sample rate elevation mask or SV s you can easily do this by changing these values in the first row then right clicking on that row and select the Auto Config interval you desire The edited values you entered in the first row will be copied into all of the other rows automatically 2 The selections for 15 Minute and 30 Minute sessions are not available with pre CJ10 receiver firmware versions 4 1 5 4 6 Project Information The Receiver Project Settings window allows you to edit data that is stored as part of the current file being recorded in the receiver s memory Most of the information in this window is what is used to create the Ashtech Receiver Site file or S File 135 Receiver Project Settings m Project Information Antenna Height Information Site Slant 0 00000 Ant Ht 0 000 Radius 0 0000 Session i Vertical Offset 0 00000 Revur SH M Horizontal Displacements _ Ant SH Azimuth 0 000000 Month Day 3 Distance o oo00 Operator Code ss 7 Send X Cancel lt Ashtec Parameter Description Site The 4 character Site ID This ID will be written as the Site ID for each epoch recorded and part of the S File information when recorded data are converted to normal Ashtech data files Entries must be exactly four characters and contain no b
314. that these programs need For example how can TRUMP call PKZIP with the name of the files just converted After all with each file converted the name and information about the files change The answer is Mnemonics A Mnemonic is a placeholder for an entity that will later be replaced by an actual value For example TRUMP maintains a mnemonic for the name of a B File as BF Notice that the Mnemonic both starts and ends with a dollar character This is because TRUMP must recognize the entities i e mnemonics that will later be substituted with actual values To re write the above example in a TRUMP mnemonic form we would write the following PKZIP MYZIPFIL SBFS Later when this Post Convert needs to be executed the name of the converted file for example BSITAA02 326 will be substituted for the BF mnemonic That is the post convert command is first translated and then executed In this example the post convert command would be translated as follows PKZIP MYZIPFIL BSITAA02 326 Again the mnemonics act as placeholders for actual values that are substituted just before the command is executed For those readers that have never written a program this is a form of programming i e you will be writing instructions in a predefined language that will accomplish the tasks you need The following is a list of the mnemonics and their descriptions as of the time this section was written that were implemented within TR
315. the MMME The 3 character month name of the end of the data for the downloaded receiver downloaded file 51 Description The 2 digit day of the month of the start of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file The 2 digit day of the month of the end of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file The 3 digit day of the year of the start of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file The 2 digit day of the year of the end of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file The 3 digit day of the year used in naming any RINEX files The 2 digit hour of the GPS day of the start of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file The 2 digit hour of the GPS day of the end of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file A single character that represents the start GPS hour of the data for the downloaded receiver file as reported by the receiver in the File Information related to the downloaded file A single character that represents the end GPS hour of th
316. thed codephase observations XYZAshRx I BN102A97 323 EN102A97 323 p D RINEX OUT C 0 The converter uses the files BN102A97 323 and EN102A97 323 from the current working directory as the input B and E Files respectively Because no O or N parameters were specified XYZAshRx will automatically name the RINEX observation and navigation output files but will place these files in the directory D RINEX OUT Additionally the C parameter specifies that there will be no i e 0 site change records written to the output RINEX observation file To convert a meteorological file stored in a NMEA capture file from the command line use the following form to call XYZAshRx XYZAshRx M inmetfile outmetfile gpswk gpswksec 174 where inmet file The name of the input meteorological file If no path is provided it is assumed that the file will come from the current working directory outmetfile The name of the output RINEX meteorological file If no path is provided it is assumed that the file will be output to the same directory in which the input file is stored gpswk Specifies the start day of the input file This field allows you to specify the GPS week component of time This field will be ignored if supplied when the input meteorological data is an Ashtech D File gpswksec Specify the start day of the input file This field allows you to specify the seconds of GPS week component of time This field will be ignored
317. tion will cause Micro Manager to set the Sel status of all files to Yes The Deselect All Files menu option will cause Micro Manager to set the Sel status of all files to No Selecting the Change Output Path option will present the output path selection described in Section 3 1 6 3 The Edit Post Download Commands option activates the post download commands editing described in Section 3 1 5 The Show Memory Map shows a detailed view of the receiver s memory map The sub menu to Delete Non U Files is visible only when there are non U Files such as a firmware file in the receiver s memory Selecting this option will cause these non U Files to be deleted from the receiver s memory The Close Active File will instruct Micro Manager to issue the active file closure command to the receiver i e the SPASHS FIL C command After issuing the file closure command Micro Manager will immediately attempt to re load the receiver file directory information Two additional items will affect the receiver files window 1 The uZ Family of receivers have been designed to allow firmware uploads and 111 2 The uZ Family of receivers treats the receiver memory in a manner similar to the way your computer handles hard disks Both of these items affect the memory use reported in the Receiver Files window Firmware uploads are discussed in more detail in Section 4 1 5 3 However some aspects
318. to convert Ashtech formatted files to RINEX files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning ge The name of the RINEX Observation Data file created from the converted Ashtech data files does not include drive letter and pathname Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert convert Ashtech formatted files to RINEX files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message The name of the RINEX Navigation Data file created from the converted Ashtech data files includes full path Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert Ashtech formatted files to RINEX files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning The name of RINEX Navigation Data file created from the converted Ashtech data files does not include drive letter and pathname Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert Ashtech formatted files to RINEX files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning 220 Description FPRXMF The name of the RINEX Meteorological Data file created from the converted Ashtech data files includes full path Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert Ashtech formatted files to RINEX files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message Depending upon the receiver configuration an Ashtech Met File may not be output through the conversion
319. ton Upon doing so you will be provided with the same window as described in Section 3 1 2 2 Simply make changes to that name in that window and press the OK button of that window 3 1 2 5 Entering Editing the Modem Initialization Strings The modem initialization strings are sent before each attempt to connect to the receiver through a modem To obtain access to these strings press the Initialization tab of the Modem 32 Configuration window Two lines of entry are permitted These two strings will be sent back to back when Micro Manager attempts to initialize the modem NOTES 1 Consult the user s guide for your modem for specifics on configuring your modem 2 Consult Section 3 1 2 for specifics on entering special character sequences 3 1 2 6 Entering Editing the Modem Dialing and Hang up Strings To get access to the dialing and hang up parameters of the selected modem press the Dialing tab of the Modem Configuration window The following provides an example of the window with the Dialing tab selected Pinin mp Hj Bakann badam Tija KAZ irie S oie r e r Iaea M4 i TM Samma eer ne Ae roe Pune messes mias fe iram raiar it oma FE Ba TR iro is ig Pane ieee Cone ease a The Dialing Prefix contains the set of characters sent to the modem just before the actual telephone number is sent The Dialing Suffix contains the set of characters sent to the modem just a
320. try and then press the button of the operation related to that entry You can immediately invoke the 38 Dial operation simply by double clicking that entry The remainder of Section 3 1 3 will describe the operations of this window in more detail The appearance of the Telephone Directory window is also configurable by the operator Not only can you resize the window you can resize the columns within the directory list To resize the columns of the directory list simply place your cursor over the column divider in the column heading wait for the mouse pointer style to change press down and hold the left mouse button move the mouse left or right to resize the column as desired and then release the left mouse button 3 1 3 1 Dialing a Telephone Directory Entry By pressing the Dial button of the Telephone Directory window Micro Manager will attempt to establish a connection with a remote system by dialing the number listed for the selected entry We defer the discussion of establishing a connection with a remote system until Chapter 4 see Section 4 1 2 Connecting to the GPS Receiver 3 1 3 2 Editing a Telephone Directory Entry To edit a telephone directory list entry simply select the desired entry and press the Edit Button Upon doing so a dialog window similar to the following will be displayed HdR of Pelee List Eire The Name of Entry field is simply a text string you wish to use to identify the telephon
321. ts components can be uninstalled via the Add Remove Programs feature of the Control Panel in Windows Please note that Micro Manager must be removed prior to installing a new version The Install Shield program which installs Micro Manager does not detect and remove old versions lt 22 Chapter 3 Configuring Micro Manager 3 0 CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW Before actually running Micro Manager you will need to install the software sentinel key Please note that Micro Manager will not run without this sentinel key Also note that you cannot start Micro Manager with the key and then later remove the key while Micro Manager is running The software sentinel key is installed by attaching the end of the sentinel key labeled ACOMPUTER to a parallel printer port of your computer Please tighten the screws of the sentinel key to connect the key securely to your computer If a printer is connected to your computer attach that cable to the sentinel If the sentinel cannot be installed because of an obstruction behind the computer you can place the sentinel key later in the parallel sequence for example you could attach the sentinel key to a DB 25 male to DB 25 female cable which is connected to your computer s parallel port To ensure a good connection between the computer the sentinel key and other parallel devices use only IEEE standard parallel printer cables The sentinel key allows Micro Manager to run on a single workstation Multip
322. ure of the receiver by setting the Sess Progr Mode to either Enabled or Sleep Mode and the Reference Day to some reference day of the year This will be explained later To disable the session programming feature within the receiver you set the Sess Progr Mode to Disabled The following provides an example where the session programming feature of the receiver has been enabled 132 Terem Mery arming Binin 2 fal ba ka ba a a nl b LLLE LEL a it at i i ie el ad PEPE Notice that the Sess Progr Mode has been set to Enabled and the Reference Day is set to a non zero value The Reference Day denotes the day of the year to which the programmed sessions are referenced That is the times are defined in the context of that day The reference day is needed as a reference for the Offset Per Day field These two fields describe the amount of time i e minutes seconds to subtract per day since the reference day In this way you can design your sessions to nearly coincide with the periodicity of the satellite geometry i e the current GPS satellite geometry will be approximately repeated 4 minutes earlier each day Whereas this feature was once frequently used we realize this is no longer so Today users prefer to set the Offset Per Day to zero so that the session will cover the exact same time every day In summary the Reference Day and
323. uring communication with modem and GPS receiver using that modem Before continuing with the description of each edit field it is important to note that there are two special character sequences that can be entered as part of the modem strings Often strings sent to the modem to configure it and responses from that modem contain special i e non printable characters ASCH control codes listed in Appendix B of this document are used to represent these special characters For example the end of an initialization string often requires a carriage return character The ASCII control code for this character is M i e normally entered by pressing the keyboard control character and then while holding the control 30 key down pressing the M Because Windows uses these special control sequences for other purposes one cannot enter these codes directly into the edit field As such we must represent the control character in the edit fields in another way We have chosen to use caret character to represent the control character Thus to enter M you enter the caret character i e followed by capitol M That is M is entered as M To enter a single symbol into the modem strings enter i e two caret characters It is also often desired to introduce a delay when sending characters to the modem In the above window you will see the symbol in a modem initialization string This charac
324. uring the conversion process the post download command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post download command The name of RINEX Meteorological Data file created from the converted Ashtech data files does not include drive letter and pathname See Sections 4 1 5 1 for a discussion on receiver file conversion after download Notes 1 Whenever the option to convert downloaded receiver files to Ashtech formatted files HAS NOT BEEN selected i e checked entering this mnemonic will elicit a warning message Depending upon the receiver configuration an Ashtech Met File may not be output through the conversion process These Met Files normally contain data collected by external sensors Micro Manager has no way to verify this when the command is created If no Met File is created during the conversion process the post download command containing this mnemonic will still be launched but its effect on the system depends upon the application being called by the post download command The mnemonic will be translated to a single dollar character That is the dollar character is normally used to mark the start and end points of a mnemonic However the mnemonic means that the final translated command line command will contain an actual dollar character On a final and important note we said that the Post Download Commands are launched
325. use the INI file from that new directory This copy would thus utilize a configuration that is independent of the other copy i e the original copy of XYZs_FTP on your computer In contrast launching two copies of the XYZs_FTP from the same directory will result in the same INI file being accessed The configuration stored at the end of the program runs is dependent upon which copy of the program terminated first Needless to say you are strongly advised not to launch more than one copy of XYZs_FTP from the same directory unless you intend to have both copies use the exact same configuration information which is what is the intent of the Q option described in Section G 3 2 Launching several copies of XYZs_FTP each originating from its own directory is perfectly acceptable and encouraged 189 G 3 1 Manual GUI Approach Upon starting XYZs_FTP without command line parameters the following is displayed Main Menu Quick Operation Buttons FTP Host Area The XYZs of GPS Inc Help FTP Program File fonfiguraticn Stop Transfer Connect Remote Directory Local Directory Ermav28_97 JE En Ge MAY28_97 5 19 38 8 0 1002 512 Dec 23 01 14 BFAIR2Z97 148 i 2 1123 1002 Jun 8 2001 GG12 B isang ay S13 3002 ag 25 1e Ah ntar K BK usE 2 1585 1002 b Jun 8 2001 L xii ax 2 use 2 1474 1002 Oct 22 22 45 Locus Tee 3 1585 1002 Rug 28 00 26 Marine Ref
326. ut path used by UpackU12 select the Output Path sub menu item of the File main menu item Upon doing so you will be provided a window similar to the following File Output Path E TEMP1 Through this window you can Browse to locate the output directory used for the converted files F 3 1 2 File Selection Window The File Selection Window is displayed in response to the File Convert selection from the program s main menu The following provides an example of the File Selection Window 180 uz12 File Conversion INPUT Hales SEOS BYTES dered Target Dire bIOWSE REVETICO AULO Hames Mmana Pots COnVETT Notice in the example that there are several fields and buttons disabled disabled features are indicated by the light gray appearance of the labels and text contained in the fields This is because there has been no input file selected To select an input file e the image file to be converted press the Browse button You will be given a window that will allow you to browse through your file system to find and select the file to be converted Upon selecting a valid receiver image file the window will change to allow the editing of the disabled fields and will automatically create the names of the output files These output file names automatically generated by UpackU12 are based upon the time tag information stored in the image file The screen capture
327. ver connection Yes Yes Remote modem receiver connection No Yes Full control over dialing parameters and No Yes hardware handshaking for modems Dialing directory facilities No Yes Modem settings No Yes RINEX Site Header table Feature No Yes Post Download Command Feature No Yes D file to Met RINEX file No Yes XYZs_FTP Activated No Yes 15 Minute RINEX 2 2 File Naming Yes Yes iCGRS Network Config Support Yes Yes TRUMP Activated Yes Yes 12 Chapter 1 Introduction to Micro Manager 1 0 OVERVIEW Micro Manager is a PC based program that was designed for the management of remotely and locally operated uZ Family of GPS receivers Micro Manager software provides users with the ability to control essential receiver parameters and logging features while allowing full access to all of the data stored within the receiver Users can interface with the program using its state of the art Graphical User s Interface GUD or through command line options which facilitate automation The result is an advanced reference station system capable of managing numerous GPS receivers These receivers can be located locally or through its modem access features virtually anywhere in the world Micro Manager was designed to run on Windows 95 98 ME NT 2000 platforms While capable of operating on all of these platforms Micro Manager is 32 bit in nature and takes full advantage of the preemptive multi tasking and multi threading capabilities of the Windows N
328. will instruct the GPS receiver to change its communication speed to that which you have selected and then command your local computer to change its communication speed as well If you answer No then Micro Manager will command the receiver to change its communication speed but will not command the computer to change its speed Thus the two will be communicating at different speeds and you will be unable to communicate with the receiver until you either correct the computer s communication speed see Section 3 1 1 3 or Poll the Receiver s Baud see Section 4 1 2 The second area of the Receiver Communication Port Settings window deals with the configuration of a modem attached to the GPS receiver Through this area you can configure the type of modem and select the receiver port on which the modem is attached There are several predefined modem types that can be selected through this window When you select these predefined types several edit fields e g Initialization String Config String Data Escape and Command Escape become disabled This is because these fields are pre defined and cannot be edited If however your modem type is not listed or you want something different from the defaults you can select the USER DEFINED modem type and provide the other parameters required to define your own modem type Shortly we will describe the parameter that you edit when you define a USER DEFINED modem type B

Micro-Manager 2.0.00 Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents